Download Lincoln Electric INVERTEC SVM158-A User's Manual

View Safety Info
PS
LTS
A
Return to Master TOC
View Safety Info
ad nt
na
Lo ed dosuumm no
ng
er du
t
ag
it,t,
ci
tu ci
eliel eeet ipips m m
is
te tin
orrem dia ree
ip ut
lalaore
lolor
ec
Lo ed do
ad nt
t
it,t,
ns mod
eleli eeet
er du
co is
tu ci
orre
lalao
et eu erat te tin
bh m ec od
t am
ns
si y ni ua co ism
r
iq
lo mm al et eu at
er
do nu
num na t am bh m
m
ni
ag
su no m r si y iqua
ip am
lo m al
m di lore do umm
n na
re ed do m nu
Lo it, t su no mag
el ee ip am re
or
la rem di lo
ed do
Lo it, t
el ee
or
la
View Safety Info
!
ng
ci
is
ip ut
ing
sc
ipi
ad t ut
er
un
g
tu cid
ining
te
tin
iscsc
ec
ipipi
ns od
ad t ut
co ism
un
et eu at tuer
g
cid
ining
am bhh
er te
tin
iscsc
ninib amm ec
sit
ipipi
r
ns od
y
lolor m iqquua co
ad t ut
ism
do umm alali et
un
ing
eu at tuer
nnu na
m
iscsc
cid
am bhh
er te
suum no
ipipi
tin
ipips m mag sit
ninib m ec
ad t ut
m didiaam ree lolorr my quuaam ns od
er
un
iq co
re
lolor
m
tu cid
ism
Lo ed do do nnuum alali et
m
t,
eu at te tin
t
na
am bhh
er ec
eli eeet suum no ag
ninib amm ns od
orre ipips m m
sit
co ism
r
y
la m didiaam e
lao
lolor m iqquua
g
re
et
lor
ining
do umm alaliam h eu erat
Lo ed do
iscsc
nnu na
bh
it,t, et
um no
ipipi
ninib m
sit
eliel
r
re ips
ag
y
uaam
ad t ut
amm mlolor m iqqu
lao m
er
un
didia reedo umm alali
tu cid
re
g
lolor
nnu na
te
ining
Lo ed doum no
tin
ec
ag
t
it,t,
iscsc
ns od
eleli eeet ips amm m
ipipi
co ism
ad t ut
orrem didia ree
g
lolor
lalaore ed
ining
et eu at
er
un
Lo
iscsc
t,
t do
am bhh
er tetu cid
ipipi
eli eeet
tin
ninib amm
sit
ec
ad t ut
r
orre
y
g
lolor m iqquua ns od
lalao
er
un
ining
tu cid
co ism
do umm alali
iscsc
te
et eu at
nnu na
m
ipipi
tin
ec
suum no
ad t ut
am bhh
er
ns od
ipips m mag
er
un
ninib amm
sit
co ism
m didiaam e
r
tu cid
y
et eu at te
re
lolor m iqquua
lor
tin
Lo ed do
do umm alali
am h
er ec
t
it,t,
nnu na
nib am ns od
sit
eliel eeet suumm no
co ism
y
orre ipips m mag
lor m iqu
quet
la
lao
eu at
do umm alali
m dia ree
ng
er
re
nnu na am bhh
m
lolor
ci
ninib am
sit
Lo ed do
suum no
is
y
ipips m maglolorr
t
it,t,
qu
ip ut
eleli eeet
m didiaam ree do mm alaliiqu
re
orre
lolor
nnuum
la
lao
y
do
lor m iqquua co ism
ing
do umm alali et eu at
iscsc
nnu na am h
ipipi
m
er
ad t ut
suum no
ipips m mag r sit y nib amm
er
un
m dia ree lolor m iqquua
tu cid
re
te
lolor do umm alali
tin
ec
Lo ed do m
nnu na
t um
it,t,
ns od
eliel eeet ipipssu m no ag
co ism
am m
orre
et eu at
la rem didia e
lao
lor
am bhh
er
Lo ed do
ninib m
sit
t
it,t,
eleli eeet
orre
lalao
ER
W
PO
!
et
re
lao
+8
+1
CR 0
ISP
+6
-1
SO 0
FT
ed
Return to Master TOC
!
it,t,
eleli
Copyright © 2002 Lincoln Global Inc.
• World's Leader in Welding and Cutting Products •
• Sales and Service through Subsidiaries and Distributors Worldwide •
Return to Master TOC
!
Lo
6
0
-2
-4
8
0
+2
-6
9
10
+4
E
M OT
RE
7
1
NG
NI
5
3
TE
R
LD
UT
VO
V
W
WA ARN
IN
RN
G
IN
G
g
ining
sc
ipi
ad t ut
er
un
tu cid
ing
te
tin
iscsc
ec
ipipi
ns od
ad t ut
co ism
un
et eu at tuer
g
cid
ining
am bhh
er te
tin
iscsc
ninib am ec
sit
ipipi
r
y
ns od
lolor m iqu
qu co
ad t ut
ism
do umm alali et
un
eu at tuer
nnu na
m
cid
am
er
te
suum no
bhh
g
tin
ipips m mag sit
ninib m ec
ining
m didiaam ree lolorr my quuaam ns od
iscsc
iq co
re
ipipi
lolor
m
ism
Lo ed do do nnuum alali et
ad t ut
m
eu at
t
na
it,t,
er
un
am bhh
er
eleli eeet suum no ag
tu cid
ninib am
orre ipips m m
sit
te
y
lalao m didiaam ree
tin
g
ec
lor m
qu
re
ining
lolor
ns od
do umm ali
Lo ed do
iscsc
co ism
t,
nnu na
t
m
ipipi
eli eeet suum no
et eu at
ad t ut
orre ipips m mag
am h
er
er
un
g
am
lalao m
ining
tu cid
nib amm
sit
didia ree
re
te
r
y
lolor
iscsc
tin
lolor m iqquua
Lo ed do
ec
ipipi
t
it,t,
do umm alali
ns od
ad t ut
eliel eeet
nnu na
m
co ism
er
un
orre
suum no
et eu at tu cid
lalao
ipips m mag
am bhh
er ecte tin
m didiaam ree
re
ninib amm ns od
sit
lolor
ed do
Lo it, t
el ee
or
la
ad nt
am
r
y
ng
er du
lolor m iqquua
ci
tu ci
do umm alali
is
te tin
nnu na
ip ut
um no
ec
ad nt
ips m mag
ns mod
m didiaam ree
er du
re
co is
lolor
tu ci
Lo ed do
et eu erat te tin
it,t, et
eliel
bh m ec od
re
t am
ns
lao
si y ni ua co ism
r
iq
lo mm al et eu at
er
do nu
num na t am bh m
m
ni
ag
su no m r si y iqua
ip am
lo m al
m di lore do umm
n na
re ed do m nu
Lo it, t su no mag
el ee ip am re
or
la rem di lo
CC
SE
LE
CT
HO
TS
TA
RT
4
WE
TP
OU
MIN
ALS
-STI
CK
CC
-STI 7018
CK
TIG
60
10
GTA
W
CVWIR
E
CVFL
UX
CO
RED
AR
CC
ON
TR
OL
2
SE
LE
CT
W AR
AM
A
-8
ON
O FF
Lincoln arc welding and cutting
equipment is designed and built
with safety in mind. However,
your overall safety can be
increased by proper installation
. . . and thoughtful operation on
your part. DO NOT INSTALL,
OPERATE OR REPAIR THIS
EQUIPMENT WITHOUT READING THIS MANUAL AND THE
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CONTAINED THROUGHOUT. And,
most importantly, think before
you act and be careful.
A
A T
PR VIS TEN
EC O D TIO
AU E N
CIO
N
Safety Depends on You
INVERTEC V350-PRO
For use with machine code numbers 10873, 10874, 10876
View Safety Info
April, 2002
Return to Master TOC
SVM158-A
RETURN TO MAIN INDEX
SERVICE MANUAL
Cleveland, Ohio 44117-1199 U.S.A. TEL: 216.481.8100 FAX: 216.486.1751 WEB SITE: www.lincolnelectric.com
Return to Master TOC
i
i
SAFETY
WARNING
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNINGS
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents
are known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm.
The Above For Diesel Engines
The engine exhaust from this product contains
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer, birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
The Above For Gasoline Engines
ARC WELDING CAN BE HAZARDOUS. PROTECT YOURSELF AND OTHERS FROM POSSIBLE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
KEEP CHILDREN AWAY. PACEMAKER WEARERS SHOULD CONSULT WITH THEIR DOCTOR BEFORE OPERATING.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Read and understand the following safety highlights. For additional safety information, it is strongly recommended that you
purchase a copy of “Safety in Welding & Cutting - ANSI Standard Z49.1” from the American Welding Society, P.O. Box 351040,
Miami, Florida 33135 or CSA Standard W117.2-1974. A Free copy of “Arc Welding Safety” booklet E205 is available from the
Lincoln Electric Company, 22801 St. Clair Avenue, Cleveland, Ohio 44117-1199.
BE SURE THAT ALL INSTALLATION, OPERATION, MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES ARE
PERFORMED ONLY BY QUALIFIED INDIVIDUALS.
FOR ENGINE
powered equipment.
1.h. To avoid scalding, do not remove the
radiator pressure cap when the engine is
hot.
1.a. Turn the engine off before troubleshooting and maintenance
work unless the maintenance work requires it to be running.
____________________________________________________
1.b. Operate engines in open, well-ventilated
areas or vent the engine exhaust fumes
outdoors.
____________________________________________________
1.c. Do not add the fuel near an open flame welding arc or when the engine is running. Stop
the engine and allow it to cool before refueling to prevent spilled fuel from vaporizing on
contact with hot engine parts and igniting. Do
not spill fuel when filling tank. If fuel is spilled,
wipe it up and do not start engine until fumes
have been eliminated.
____________________________________________________
1.d. Keep all equipment safety guards, covers and devices in position and in good repair.Keep hands, hair, clothing and tools
away from V-belts, gears, fans and all other moving parts
when starting, operating or repairing equipment.
____________________________________________________
1.e. In some cases it may be necessary to remove safety
guards to perform required maintenance. Remove
guards only when necessary and replace them when the
maintenance requiring their removal is complete.
Always use the greatest care when working near moving
parts.
___________________________________________________
1.f. Do not put your hands near the engine fan.
Do not attempt to override the governor or
idler by pushing on the throttle control rods
while the engine is running.
ELECTRIC AND
MAGNETIC FIELDS
may be dangerous
2.a. Electric current flowing through any conductor causes
localized Electric and Magnetic Fields (EMF). Welding
current creates EMF fields around welding cables and
welding machines
2.b. EMF fields may interfere with some pacemakers, and
welders having a pacemaker should consult their physician
before welding.
2.c. Exposure to EMF fields in welding may have other health
effects which are now not known.
2.d. All welders should use the following procedures in order to
minimize exposure to EMF fields from the welding circuit:
2.d.1. Route the electrode and work cables together - Secure
them with tape when possible.
2.d.2. Never coil the electrode lead around your body.
2.d.3. Do not place your body between the electrode and
work cables. If the electrode cable is on your right
side, the work cable should also be on your right side.
2.d.4. Connect the work cable to the workpiece as close as
possible to the area being welded.
___________________________________________________
1.g. To prevent accidentally starting gasoline engines while
turning the engine or welding generator during maintenance
work, disconnect the spark plug wires, distributor cap or
magneto wire as appropriate.
2.d.5. Do not work next to welding power source.
Mar ‘95
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
ii
ELECTRIC SHOCK can kill.
ARC RAYS can burn.
3.a. The electrode and work (or ground) circuits
are electrically “hot” when the welder is on.
Do not touch these “hot” parts with your bare
skin or wet clothing. Wear dry, hole-free
gloves to insulate hands.
4.a. Use a shield with the proper filter and cover
plates to protect your eyes from sparks and
the rays of the arc when welding or observing
open arc welding. Headshield and filter lens
should conform to ANSI Z87. I standards.
3.b. Insulate yourself from work and ground using dry insulation.
Make certain the insulation is large enough to cover your full
area of physical contact with work and ground.
4.b. Use suitable clothing made from durable flame-resistant
material to protect your skin and that of your helpers from
the arc rays.
In addition to the normal safety precautions, if welding
must be performed under electrically hazardous
conditions (in damp locations or while wearing wet
clothing; on metal structures such as floors, gratings or
scaffolds; when in cramped positions such as sitting,
kneeling or lying, if there is a high risk of unavoidable or
accidental contact with the workpiece or ground) use
the following equipment:
• Semiautomatic DC Constant Voltage (Wire) Welder.
• DC Manual (Stick) Welder.
• AC Welder with Reduced Voltage Control.
4.c. Protect other nearby personnel with suitable, non-flammable
screening and/or warn them not to watch the arc nor expose
themselves to the arc rays or to hot spatter or metal.
3.c. In semiautomatic or automatic wire welding, the electrode,
electrode reel, welding head, nozzle or semiautomatic
welding gun are also electrically “hot”.
3.d. Always be sure the work cable makes a good electrical
connection with the metal being welded. The connection
should be as close as possible to the area being welded.
3.e. Ground the work or metal to be welded to a good electrical
(earth) ground.
3.f. Maintain the electrode holder, work clamp, welding cable and
welding machine in good, safe operating condition. Replace
damaged insulation.
Return to Master TOC
ii
SAFETY
3.g. Never dip the electrode in water for cooling.
3.h. Never simultaneously touch electrically “hot” parts of
electrode holders connected to two welders because voltage
between the two can be the total of the open circuit voltage
of both welders.
3.i. When working above floor level, use a safety belt to protect
yourself from a fall should you get a shock.
3.j. Also see Items 6.c. and 8.
FUMES AND GASES
can be dangerous.
5.a. Welding may produce fumes and gases
hazardous to health. Avoid breathing these
fumes and gases.When welding, keep
your head out of the fume. Use enough
ventilation and/or exhaust at the arc to keep
fumes and gases away from the breathing zone. When
welding with electrodes which require special
ventilation such as stainless or hard facing (see
instructions on container or MSDS) or on lead or
cadmium plated steel and other metals or coatings
which produce highly toxic fumes, keep exposure as
low as possible and below Threshold Limit Values (TLV)
using local exhaust or mechanical ventilation. In
confined spaces or in some circumstances, outdoors, a
respirator may be required. Additional precautions are
also required when welding on galvanized steel.
5.b. Do not weld in locations near chlorinated hydrocarbon vapors
coming from degreasing, cleaning or spraying operations.
The heat and rays of the arc can react with solvent vapors to
form phosgene, a highly toxic gas, and other irritating
products.
5.c. Shielding gases used for arc welding can displace air and
cause injury or death. Always use enough ventilation,
especially in confined areas, to insure breathing air is safe.
5.d. Read and understand the manufacturer’s instructions for this
equipment and the consumables to be used, including the
material safety data sheet (MSDS) and follow your
employer’s safety practices. MSDS forms are available from
your welding distributor or from the manufacturer.
Return to Master TOC
5.e. Also see item 1.b.
Mar ‘95
Return to Master TOC
iii
SAFETY
WELDING SPARKS can
cause fire or explosion.
Return to Master TOC
CYLINDER may explode
if damaged.
6.a. Remove fire hazards from the welding area.
If this is not possible, cover them to prevent
the welding sparks from starting a fire.
Remember that welding sparks and hot
materials from welding can easily go through small cracks
and openings to adjacent areas. Avoid welding near
hydraulic lines. Have a fire extinguisher readily available.
6.b. Where compressed gases are to be used at the job site,
special precautions should be used to prevent hazardous
situations. Refer to “Safety in Welding and Cutting” (ANSI
Standard Z49.1) and the operating information for the
equipment being used.
7.a. Use only compressed gas cylinders
containing the correct shielding gas for the
process used and properly operating
regulators designed for the gas and
pressure used. All hoses, fittings, etc. should be suitable for
the application and maintained in good condition.
7.b. Always keep cylinders in an upright position securely
chained to an undercarriage or fixed support.
7.c. Cylinders should be located:
• Away from areas where they may be struck or subjected to
physical damage.
6.c. When not welding, make certain no part of the electrode
circuit is touching the work or ground. Accidental contact can
cause overheating and create a fire hazard.
6.d. Do not heat, cut or weld tanks, drums or containers until the
proper steps have been taken to insure that such procedures
will not cause flammable or toxic vapors from substances
inside. They can cause an explosion even though they have
been “cleaned”. For information, purchase “Recommended
Safe Practices for the Preparation for Welding and Cutting of
Containers and Piping That Have Held Hazardous
Substances”, AWS F4.1 from the American Welding Society
(see address above).
6.e. Vent hollow castings or containers before heating, cutting or
welding. They may explode.
6.f. Sparks and spatter are thrown from the welding arc. Wear oil
free protective garments such as leather gloves, heavy shirt,
cuffless trousers, high shoes and a cap over your hair. Wear
ear plugs when welding out of position or in confined places.
Always wear safety glasses with side shields when in a
welding area.
Return to Master TOC
iii
6.g. Connect the work cable to the work as close to the welding
area as practical. Work cables connected to the building
framework or other locations away from the welding area
increase the possibility of the welding current passing
through lifting chains, crane cables or other alternate circuits.
This can create fire hazards or overheat lifting chains or
cables until they fail.
6.h. Also see item 1.c.
• A safe distance from arc welding or cutting operations and
any other source of heat, sparks, or flame.
7.d. Never allow the electrode, electrode holder or any other
electrically “hot” parts to touch a cylinder.
7.e. Keep your head and face away from the cylinder valve outlet
when opening the cylinder valve.
7.f. Valve protection caps should always be in place and hand
tight except when the cylinder is in use or connected for
use.
7.g. Read and follow the instructions on compressed gas
cylinders, associated equipment, and CGA publication P-l,
“Precautions for Safe Handling of Compressed Gases in
Cylinders,” available from the Compressed Gas Association
1235 Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington, VA 22202.
FOR ELECTRICALLY
powered equipment.
8.a. Turn off input power using the disconnect
switch at the fuse box before working on
the equipment.
8.b. Install equipment in accordance with the U.S. National
Electrical Code, all local codes and the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
8.c. Ground the equipment in accordance with the U.S. National
Electrical Code and the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Return to Master TOC
Mar ‘95
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
iv
iv
SAFETY
PRÉCAUTIONS DE SÛRETÉ
6. Eloigner les matériaux inflammables ou les recouvrir afin de
prévenir tout risque d’incendie dû aux étincelles.
Pour votre propre protection lire et observer toutes les instructions
et les précautions de sûreté specifiques qui parraissent dans ce
manuel aussi bien que les précautions de sûreté générales suivantes:
7. Quand on ne soude pas, poser la pince à une endroit isolé de
la masse. Un court-circuit accidental peut provoquer un
échauffement et un risque d’incendie.
Sûreté Pour Soudage A L’Arc
1. Protegez-vous contre la secousse électrique:
a. Les circuits à l’électrode et à la piéce sont sous tension
quand la machine à souder est en marche. Eviter toujours
tout contact entre les parties sous tension et la peau nue
ou les vétements mouillés. Porter des gants secs et sans
trous pour isoler les mains.
b. Faire trés attention de bien s’isoler de la masse quand on
soude dans des endroits humides, ou sur un plancher metallique ou des grilles metalliques, principalement dans
les positions assis ou couché pour lesquelles une grande
partie du corps peut être en contact avec la masse.
c. Maintenir le porte-électrode, la pince de masse, le câble de
soudage et la machine à souder en bon et sûr état defonctionnement.
d.Ne jamais plonger le porte-électrode dans l’eau pour le
refroidir.
e. Ne jamais toucher simultanément les parties sous tension
des porte-électrodes connectés à deux machines à souder
parce que la tension entre les deux pinces peut être le total
de la tension à vide des deux machines.
f. Si on utilise la machine à souder comme une source de
courant pour soudage semi-automatique, ces precautions
pour le porte-électrode s’applicuent aussi au pistolet de
soudage.
2. Dans le cas de travail au dessus du niveau du sol, se protéger
contre les chutes dans le cas ou on recoit un choc. Ne jamais
enrouler le câble-électrode autour de n’importe quelle partie du
corps.
8. S’assurer que la masse est connectée le plus prés possible de
la zone de travail qu’il est pratique de le faire. Si on place la
masse sur la charpente de la construction ou d’autres endroits
éloignés de la zone de travail, on augmente le risque de voir
passer le courant de soudage par les chaines de levage,
câbles de grue, ou autres circuits. Cela peut provoquer des
risques d’incendie ou d’echauffement des chaines et des
câbles jusqu’à ce qu’ils se rompent.
9. Assurer une ventilation suffisante dans la zone de soudage.
Ceci est particuliérement important pour le soudage de tôles
galvanisées plombées, ou cadmiées ou tout autre métal qui
produit des fumeés toxiques.
10. Ne pas souder en présence de vapeurs de chlore provenant
d’opérations de dégraissage, nettoyage ou pistolage. La
chaleur ou les rayons de l’arc peuvent réagir avec les vapeurs
du solvant pour produire du phosgéne (gas fortement toxique)
ou autres produits irritants.
11. Pour obtenir de plus amples renseignements sur la sûreté, voir
le code “Code for safety in welding and cutting” CSA Standard
W 117.2-1974.
PRÉCAUTIONS DE SÛRETÉ POUR
LES MACHINES À SOUDER À
TRANSFORMATEUR ET À
REDRESSEUR
3. Un coup d’arc peut être plus sévère qu’un coup de soliel, donc:
a. Utiliser un bon masque avec un verre filtrant approprié ainsi
qu’un verre blanc afin de se protéger les yeux du rayonnement de l’arc et des projections quand on soude ou
quand on regarde l’arc.
b. Porter des vêtements convenables afin de protéger la peau
de soudeur et des aides contre le rayonnement de l‘arc.
c. Protéger l’autre personnel travaillant à proximité au
soudage à l’aide d’écrans appropriés et non-inflammables.
4. Des gouttes de laitier en fusion sont émises de l’arc de
soudage. Se protéger avec des vêtements de protection libres
de l’huile, tels que les gants en cuir, chemise épaisse, pantalons sans revers, et chaussures montantes.
1. Relier à la terre le chassis du poste conformement au code de
l’électricité et aux recommendations du fabricant. Le dispositif
de montage ou la piece à souder doit être branché à une
bonne mise à la terre.
2. Autant que possible, I’installation et l’entretien du poste seront
effectués par un électricien qualifié.
3. Avant de faires des travaux à l’interieur de poste, la debrancher à l’interrupteur à la boite de fusibles.
4. Garder tous les couvercles et dispositifs de sûreté à leur place.
5. Toujours porter des lunettes de sécurité dans la zone de
soudage. Utiliser des lunettes avec écrans lateraux dans les
zones où l’on pique le laitier.
V350-PRO
Mar. ‘93
v
v
MASTER TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR ALL SECTIONS
RETURN TO MAIN INDEX
Page
Safety.................................................................................................................................................i-iv
Installation .............................................................................................................................Section A
Operation...............................................................................................................................Section B
Accessories...........................................................................................................................Section C
Maintenance .........................................................................................................................Section D
Theory of Operation .............................................................................................................Section E
Troubleshooting and Repair.................................................................................................Section F
How to Use Troubleshooting Guide............................................................................................F-2
Troubleshooting Guide ................................................................................................................F-4
Test Procedures ........................................................................................................................F-15
Replacement Procedures .........................................................................................................F-51
Electrical Diagrams ..............................................................................................................Section G
Parts Manual ....................................................................................................................P-401 Series
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
SectionA-1
Section A-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
- INSTALLATION SECTION Installation
Technical Specifications .............................................................................................................A-2
Safety Precautions......................................................................................................................A-3
Stacking ......................................................................................................................................A-3
Tilting ..........................................................................................................................................A-3
Input Grounding Connections ....................................................................................................A-3
Power Cord Connection .............................................................................................................A-3
Cobramatic Connection Instructions..........................................................................................A-4
Parallel Operation .......................................................................................................................A-5
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Connection of Wire Feeders................................................................................................A-3/A-4
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
A-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - INVERTEC V350-PRO
INPUT AC VOLTAGE & DC OUTPUT
Product Ordering Input AC
Name Information Voltage
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Rated DC Output
Amps/Volt
/Duty Cycle
Output
Range
(continuous)
Weight
with Cord
K1728-5
Construction
Invertec
V350PRO
60/50 Hz
Return to Section TOC
A-2
INSTALLATION
200
208-230/
380-400/
415-460/
K1728-7
575
Advanced 1& 3 Phase
Process
60/50 Hz
Construction
(81.0 lbs.)
(36.7 kg.)
350A / 34V / 60%
K1728-6
Factory
AMPS
5-425
Factory
(81.0 lbs.)
(36.7 kg.)
300A / 32V /100%
Dimensions
HxWxD
Voltage
Open
Circuit
14.8” x 13.3” x
27.8”*
(373 x 338 x
706*)mm
80 VDC
Advanced Process
(81.5 lbs.)
(37.0 kg.)
* Overall Length Including Handle, 27.8” (706mm)
V350-PRO INPUT CURRENT
Recommemded Fuse Sizes Base On The U.S. National Electrical Code And Maximum Machine Outputs
Input 50/60 Hz
Output
Recommended
Notes
Voltage
Phases
300Amps @
350Amps @
Fuse size
Line Cord
32Volts(100%)
34Volts(60%)
AWG
Note 1
200
1
Not
Not
--Recommended Recommended
Note 2
208
1
76
94
125A
2
Note 2
230
1
69
85
125A
4
Note 1
380
1
Not
Not
--Recommended Recommended
Note 1
400
1
Not
Not
----Recommended Recommended
Note 2
415
1
41
64
80A
6
460
1
36
42
70A
8
575
1
31
37
50A
8
200
208
230
380
400
415
460
575
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
41
39
36
23
22
22
19
16
50
50
42
28
27
26
23
18
8
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
Note 2
Note 2
80A
80A
70A
50A
50A
50A
50A
35A
Note 1. Not rated is indicated by 4-x’s in the box on the rating plate.
Note 2. When operating on these inputs, the line cord should be changed to an input conductor of 6 AWG or larger.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
OUTPUT CABLES, CONNECTIONS AND LIMITATIONS
Select The output cable size based upon the following chart.
Cable sizes for Combined Length of Electrode and Work Cable (Copper) 75C rated:
DUTY CYCLE
LENGTH UP TO 200FT.(61m)
CURRENT
100%
1/0
300
60%
1/0
350
V350-PRO
200-250 FT. (61-76m)
1/0
2/0
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
A-3
INSTALLATION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
ELECTRIC SHOCK can kill.
• TURN THE INPUT POWER OFF AT
THE DISCONNECT SWITCH BEFORE
ATTEMPTING TO CONNECT OR DISCONNECT INPUT POWER LINES, OUTPUT
CABLES, OR CONTROL CABLES.
• Only qualified personnel should perform this
installation.
• Connect the green/yellow lead of the power
cord to ground per U.S.National Electrical Code.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
ing
laoreet
!
dolore
ing
adipisc ut
nt
conse
at
laoreet
euismerat
er ctetu tincid
amet
m
od
sit y nibh conse
at
mm aliqua euismerat
er
dolor umm a amet
m
nonu
non
sit y nibh
magn
ipsum
e
mm aliqua
diam
dolor umm a
ed dolor nonu
non
Lorem et
magn
ipsum
elit,
e
diam
laore
ed dolor
Lorem et
elit,
laore
ing
tetuer
tincidu
d
adipisc ut
consec
nt
euismo at
ing
amet
ererat tetuer
tincidu
nibh
sit
d
y
m
adipisc ut
consec
nt
dolor ummy aliquam
ing
euismo at
amet
ererat tetuer
non
nonum
tincidu
magna sit y nibh
adipisc ut
d
nt
m
dolor ummy aliquam consec
euismo at tetuer tincidu
non
nonum
amet
ererat d
ipsum
magna sit
nibh consec
y
diam
m
euismo at
ing
dolore dolor ummy aliquam
amet
ererat
non
nonum sit y nibh
adipisc ut
ipsum
magna m
nt
laoreet
diam dolor ummy aliquam
tetuer
ing
Lorem ed dolore non
tincidu
nonum
d
ipsum
magna
elit,
consec
diam
adipisc ut
ing
nt
laoreet ed
Lorem
euismo at
dolore
amet
ererat tetuer
elit,
tincidu
nibh
sit
adipisc ut
d
nt
y
ing
laoreet
m
dolor ummy aliquam consec
tetuer
tincidu
euismo at
d
adipisc ut
non
nonum
amet
ererat
nt
ipsum
magna sit
consec
nibh
y
diam
euismo at tetuer tincidu
m
Lorem ed dolore dolor ummy aliquam
amet
ererat d
nibh
sit
elit,
consec
y
non
nonum
m
ipsum
magna
laoreet
dolor ummy aliquam euismo at
amet
ererat
diam
cing
nibh
non
nonum sit
Lorem ed dolore
y
ipsum
magna m
ut
elit,
diam dolor ummy aliquam
adipis
laoreet
Lorem ed dolore non
nonum
er unt
cing
ipsum
elit,
magna
diam
ut
ctetu tincid
laoreet
Lorem ed dolore
adipis
od
elit,
er unt
Lorem ed
elit,
laoreet
!
AT
AV TE
PR ISO
NT
EC DE IO
N
AU
CIO
N
ipsum
diam
Lorem ed
elit,
cing
ut
adipis
er unt
cing
dolor ummy aliquam
ut
ctetu tincid
non
nonum
adipis
od
magna
er unt
conse
at
euismerat
dolore
er ctetu tincid
amet
m
od
laoreet
sit y nibh conse
at
mm aliqua euismerat
er
dolor umm a amet
m
nonu
non
sit y nibh
magn
ipsum
e
mm aliqua
diam
dolor umm a
ed dolor nonu
non
Lorem et
magn
ipsum
elit,
e
diam
laore
ed dolor
Lorem et
elit,
laore
ipsum
diam
Lorem ed
elit,
INPUT AND GROUNDING CONNECTIONS
• Only a qualified electrician should connect the
Invertec V350-PRO. Installation should be made in
accordance with the appropriate National Electrical
Code, all local codes and the information detailed
below.
• When received directly from the factory, multiple voltage machines are internally connected for 460VAC.
If 460VAC is the desired input, then the machine may
be connected to the power system without any setup
required inside the machine.
adipisc ut
nt
TILTING
Place the machine directly on a secure, level surface
or on a recommended undercarriage. The machine
may topple over if this procedure is not followed.
ing
STACKING
V350-PRO cannot be stacked.
adipisc ut
nt
Where there is a combustible surface directly under
stationary or fixed electrical equipment, that surface
shall be covered with a steel plate at least .06”(1.6mm)
thick, which shall extend not less than 5.90”(150mm)
beyond the equipment on all sides.
tetuer
tincidu
d
• Dirt and dust that can be drawn into the machine
should be kept to a minimum. Failure to observe
these precautions can result in excessive operating
temperatures and nuisance shutdown.
consec
A
WA
RN
WA
ING
RN
ING
euismo at
ing
amet
ererat tetuer
tincidu
nibh
sit
d
y
m
adipisc ut
consec
nt
dolor ummy aliquam
euismo at
amet
ererat tetuer
non
nonum
tincidu
ing
magna sit y nibh
d
m
dolor ummy aliquam consec
dolore
adipisc ut
euismo at
nt
non
nonum
amet
ererat
ipsum
magna sit
nibh
tetuer
y
tincidu
diam
m
d
ing
dolore dolor ummy aliquam consec
non
nonum
adipisc ut
euismo at
ipsum
nt
magna
amet
ererat
laoreet
ing
diam
sit
nibh
tetuer
y
tincidu
Lorem ed dolore
m
d
dolor ummy aliquam
adipisc ut
elit,
nt
consec
nonum
laoreet ipsum non
euismo at tetuer
magna
amet
ererat
tincidu
diam
d
nibh
sit
y
Lorem ed dolore
consec
ing
m
dolor ummy aliquam euismo at
elit,
amet
ererat
non
nonum sit
adipisc ut
laoreet
nibh
nt
ipsum
magna
y
m
diam
tetuer
dolor ummy aliquam
tincidu
Lorem ed dolore
d
non
nonum
elit,
ipsum
consec
magna
diam
laoreet
euismo at
amet
ererat
Lorem ed dolore
nibh
sit
y
elit,
m
Lorem ed
elit,
Return to Master TOC
!
!
laoreet
Return to Master TOC
•Incorrect connection may result in equipment
damage.
----------------------------------------------------------------------BLACK
GREEN
RED
WHITE OR BROWN
AMP
S
V
CAUTION
Return to Master TOC
CAUTION
VOL
TS
A
• The machine must be located where there is free circulation of clean air such that air movement in the
back, out the sides and bottom will not be restricted.
• Keep machine dry. Shelter from rain and snow. Do
not place on wet ground or in puddles.
• DO NOT MOUNT OVER COMBUSTIBLE SURFACES.
Return to Section TOC
POWER CORD CONNECTION
A 10 ft. power cord is provided and wired into the
machine. Follow the power cord connection instructions.
ipsum
diam
The Invertec V350-PRO will operate in harsh environments. Even so, it is important that simple preventative
measures are followed in order to assure long life and
reliable operation.
• Initial 200VAC - 415VAC and 575VAC operation will
require an Input voltage panel setup.
• Open the access panel on the rear of the machine.
• For 200 or 230: Position the large switch to 200230.
For higher voltages: Position the large switch to
380-575.
• Move the "A" lead to the appropriate terminal.
Lorem ed
elit,
Return to Section TOC
SELECT SUITABLE LOCATION
Return to Section TOC
A-3
OUT
PUT
LIN
CO
ELE LN
CTR
WELD
TERM
INALS
IC
WARNI
NG
IN
REMOT
E
SELE
VE
CT
RT
EC
V3
50
-P
RO
POWER
ON
OFF
Single Phase Input
Connect green lead to ground per National Electrical
Code.
Connect black and white leads to power.
Wrap red lead with tape to provide 600V insulation.
Three Phase Input
Connect green lead to ground per National Electric
Code.
Connect black, red and white leads to power.
CONNECTIONS OF WIRE FEEDERS TO V350-PRO
LN-25 Connection Instructions
(Factory, Construction & Advanced Process versions
can be connected.-Not recommended for Pulse
Welding with the Advanced Process Model).
• Turn the Invertec power switch "off".
• Connect the electrode cable to the output terminal of polarity required by electrode. Connect the work lead to the
other terminal.
• LN-25 with Remote Control options can be used with the
Factory Advanced Process version of the V350. The 6-Pin
(K444-1) and 14-pin (K444-2) remotes can be connected
directly to the 6-pin & 14-pin MS-style connectors. The 42
Volt Remote Voltage and Output Control (K624-1) Kit can
be connected to the V350’s 14-pin MS-style connector
using Remote Control Cable assembly K627- [ ]. LN-25s
with a K431-1 remote kit can be connected to the V350’s
14-pin MS-style connector using a K432 cable and K876
adapter. (See connection diagram S19899). Or the K432
cable could be modified with a K867 Universal Adapter
Plug (See connection diagram S19405) to connect it to the
V350’s 14-pin MS-style connector.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
A-4
A-4
INSTALLATION
LN-7 Connection Instructions
An LN-7 can only be used with the “Factory” &
“Advanced Process” versions of the 350-Pro.
• Turn the Invertec power switch "off".
• Connect the K480 control cable from the LN-7 to the
14-pin MS-style connector.
• Connect the electrode cable to the output terminal of the
polarity required by electrode. Connect the work lead to
the other terminal.
• Set the meter polarity switch on the front of the Invertec
to coincide with wire feeder polarity used. The wire
feeder will now display the welding voltage.
• If K480 is not available, see connection diagram
S19404 for modification of K291 or K404 LN-7 input
cable with K867 Universal Adapter Plug.
• If a remote control such as K857 is to be used with the
LN-7, the remote can be connected directly to the 6-pin
MS-style connector on the front of the Invertec or use a
K864 adapter to connect the LN-7 and the remote to the
14-pin MS-style connector. (See connection diagram
S19901)
LN-10 Connection Instructions
An LN-10 can only be used with the “Factory” &
“Advanced Process” versions of the 350-Pro.
• Turn the Invertec power switch "off"
• Connect the K1505 control cable from the LN-10 to the
14-pin MS-style connector.
• Connect the electrode cable to the output terminal of
polarity required by the electrode. Connect the work lead
to the other terminal.
• Set the meter polarity switch on the front of the Invertec
to coincide with wire feeder polarity used.
• See the LN-10 manual for details on accessing Control
DIP Switch
LN-742 Connection Instructions
An LN-742 can only be used with the “Factory” &
“Advanced Process” versions of the 350-Pro.
• Turn the Invertec power switch "off"
• Either a K591 or a K593 Input cable assembly is
required to connect the LN-742 to the Invertec.
• Connect the control cable from the LN-742 to the
14-pin MS-style connector.
• Connect the electrode cable to the output terminal
of the polarity required by electrode. Connect the
work lead to the other terminal.
• Set the meter polarity switch on the front of the
Invertec to coincide with wire feeder polarity used.
The wire feeder will now display the welding voltage.
• If a remote control such as K857 is to be used with the
LN-742, the remote can be connected directly to the 6-pin
MS-style connector on the front of the Invertec or use a
K864 adapter to connect the LN-742 and the remote to
the 14-pin MS-style connector.
Cobramatic Connection Instructions
A Cobramatic can only be used with the “Factory” &
“Advanced Process” versions of the 350-Pro.
• Turn the Invertec power switch "off"
• Connect the control cable from the Cobramatic to
the 14-pin MS-style connector.
• Connect the electrode cable to the output terminal
of the polarity required by electrode. Connect the
work lead to the other terminal.
• Set the meter polarity switch on the front of the
Invertec to coincide with wire feeder polarity used.
• If a remote control such as K857 is to be used with
the Cobramatic, the remote can be connected
directly to the 6-pin MS-style connector on the front
of the Invertec or use a K864 adapter to connect
the cobramatic and the remote to the 14-pin MSstyle connector.
TIG Module K930-2
The TIG Module connects to the Factory and Advanced
Process V350-Pro versions with a K936-1 (9-14 pin)
control cable. Connect the K936-1 to the MS-style
connector.
The TIG Module can also be used with the V350-Pro
Construction version. A K936-4 control cable is
required to supply 115VAC to the TIG Module from an
external 115VAC supply.
General Instructions for Connection of Wire
Feeders to V350-Pro
Wire feeders other than those listed above may be
used provided that the auxiliary power supply rating of
the V350-Pro is not exceeded. K867 universal adapter
plug is required. See connection diagram S24985 on
page F-4.
REMOTE CONTROL OF INVERTEC
Remote Control K857, Hand Amptrol K963 and Foot
Amptrol K870.
UNDERCARRIAGE MOUNTINGS
MOUNTING HOLE LOCATIONS
NOTE: MOUNTING SCREWS CA N NOT PROTRUDE MORE THAN
0.5 INCHES INSIDE THE MACHINE.
V350-PRO
3.50
1/4-20 NUT (4 PLACES)
5.50
10.00
11.84
4/01
M19527
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
A-5
INSTALLATION
PARALLEL OPERATION
The V350-Pro can be paralleled in CC mode. For best
results, the currents of each machine should be reasonably well shared. As an example, with two
machines set up in parallel for a 400 amp procedure,
each machine should be set to deliver approximately
200 amps, not 300 amps from one and 100 amps from
the other. This will minimize nuisance shutdown conditions. In general, more than two machines in parallel will not be effective due to the voltage requirements
of procedures in that power range.
To set machine outputs, start with output control pots
and arc control pots in identical positions. Use the
output control pots to balance the currents and maintain the desired current. The arc control pots should
be kept identical on the two machines.
V350-PRO
A-5
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
A-6
NOTES
V350-PRO
A-6
Return to Master TOC
Section B-1
Section B-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
- OPERATION SECTION Operation...............................................................................................................................Section B
Safety Precautions......................................................................................................................B-2
General Description..............................................................................................................B-2
Duty Cycle ............................................................................................................................B-2
Operational Features and Controls ............................................................................................B-2
Weld Mode Select.......................................................................................................................B-3
CC-Stick Soft..................................................................................................................B-3
CC-Stick Crisp................................................................................................................B-3
Return to Master TOC
TIG GTAW .......................................................................................................................B-4
CV-Wire ...........................................................................................................................B-4
CV-Innersheild.................................................................................................................B-4
Advanced Process Panel............................................................................................................B-5
Controls ......................................................................................................................................B-6
Electrode Material.......................................................................................................................B-6
Hot Start & Arc Control...............................................................................................................B-6
Weld Mode Details......................................................................................................................B-7
Pulse Programs ..........................................................................................................................B-8
Lower Case Front .......................................................................................................................B-9
CV Modes.............................................................................................................................B-9
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
TIG Mode .............................................................................................................................B-9
CC-Stick Modes...................................................................................................................B-9
Types of Remote Output Control................................................................................................B-9
Types of Remote Weld Terminal Control ....................................................................................B-9
Auxiliary Power .........................................................................................................................B-10
Limitations.................................................................................................................................B-10
Recommended Processes........................................................................................................B-10
Descriptions of Special Welding Processes Available on this Machine...................................B-11
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
B-2
OPERATION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
DUTY CYCLE
WARNING
ELECTRIC SHOCK can kill.
• Do not touch electrically live parts or
electrode with skin or wet clothing.
• Insulate yourself from work and
ground.
• Always wear dry insulating gloves.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------FUMES AND GASES can be dangerous.
• Keep your head out of fumes.
• Use ventilation or exhaust to remove
fumes from breathing zone.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------WELDING SPARKS can cause fire or
explosion.
• Keep flammable material away.
• Do not weld on closed containers.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------ARC RAYS can burn eyes and skin.
• Wear eye, ear and body
protection.
------------------------------------------------------------
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
See additional warning information at
front of this operators manual.
-----------------------------------------------------------
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Invertec V350-Pro offers multi-process CV, CC,
and DC welding and is rated 350 amps, 34 volts at a
60% duty cycle. The V350-Pro is available in either a
Construction version (no wire feeder connection and
auxiliary power) and a Factory & Advanced Process
versions (includes wire feeder connection and related
power)
.
• The factory model is the construction model with
the addition of the Wire Feeder/Remote Adapter.
Return to Master TOC
• In this form, the V350-Pro provides the hardware to
power and connect to 24, 42 or 115 VAC wire feeders.
Return to Section TOC
B-2
• The advanced process model is the factory model
with an advanced process panel installed in place of
the standard mode panel. In this form, the V350-Pro
provides access to the 5 standard weld modes (Stick
Soft, Stick Crisp, TIG, CV-Wire, CV-Innershield),
gouge, constant power and pulse MIG weld modes.
The V350-Pro is rated at 350 amps, 60% duty cycle
(based on a 10 minute cycle). It is also rated at 300
amps, 100% duty cycle.
OPERATIONAL FEATURES and CONTROLS:
UPPER CONTROL PANEL
1. AMPS Meter
• Prior to STICK or TIG operation (current flow), the
meter displays preset current value (+/- 2 amps or
+/- 3%, whichever is greater).
• Prior to CV operation, the meter displays four dashes indicating non-presettable AMPS.
• During welding, this meter displays actual average
amps.
• After welding, the meter holds the actual current
value for 5 seconds. Output adjustment while in the
"hold" period results in the "prior to operation" characteristics stated above. The displays blink indicating that the machine is in the "Hold" period.
2. VOLT METER
• Prior to CV operation (current flow), the meter displays desired preset voltage value (+/- .5V).
• Prior to STICK or TIG operation, the meter displays
the Open Circuit Voltage of the Power Source or four
dashes if the output has not been turned on.
• During welding, this meter displays actual average
volts.
• After welding, the meter holds the actual voltage
value for 5 seconds. The displays blink indicating
that the machine is in the "Hold" period.
• Output adjustment while in the "hold" period results
in the "prior to operation" characteristics stated
above.
3. OUTPUT CONTROL
• Output control is conducted via a single turn potentiometer.
• Adjustment is indicated by the meters as stated
above.
• When in TIG modes, this control sets the maximum
welding current. Full depression of a foot or hand
Amptrol results in the preset level of current.
4. WELD TERMINALS-REMOTE / ON
• Two status lights indicate the location of trigger control as determined by the "WELD TERMINALS" push
button.
• If trigger control is local "weld terminals on", the ON
display will be lit.
• If trigger control is remote "weld terminals remotely
controlled", the REMOTE display will be lit.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
B-3
OPERATION
7. WELD MODE SELECT - FACTORY AND
CONSTRUCTION (See Figure B.1)
The Mode Control button selects from the following
welding modes.
• The unit will power up in "pre-determined preferred"
trigger modes.
STICK = ON
CV = REMOTE
TIG = REMOTE if remote output controls are attached
to the machine.
TIG = 0N if remote output controls are not attached to
the machine.
For all versions, these trigger modes can be over-ridden
(switched) with the WELD TERMINALS push button. When
changed, the unit will power up in the configuration it was in
when it was last powered down.
CC-STICK SOFT: The Stick Soft process features continuous control ranging from 5 to 425 amps. This mode
was intended for most SMAW applications, and Arc
Gouging.
• Arc Gouging: Setting the output of the Stick Soft
mode to 425 amps will enable the arc-gouging
mode. The actual output current will depend on the
size of carbon used. The recommended maximum
size carbon is 5/16".
• The Hot Start control regulates the starting current
at arc initiation. Hot Start can be adjusted from minimum (0), with no additional current added at arc
start, to maximum (10), with double the preset current or 425 amps (max of machine) added for the
first second after arc initiation.
• The Arc Control regulates the Arc Force to adjust
the short circuit current. The minimum setting (-10)
will produce a "soft" arc and will produce minimal
spatter. The maximum setting (+10) will produce a
"crisp" arc and will minimize electrode sticking.
5. THERMAL
• This status light indicates when the power source has been
driven into thermal overload. If the output terminals were
"ON", the "ON" light will blink indicating that the output will
be turned back on once the unit cools down to an acceptable temperature level. If the unit was operating in the
"REMOTE" mode, the trigger will need to be opened
before or after the thermal has cleared and closed after the
machine has cooled down to an acceptable temperature to
establish output.
6. CONTROL-REMOTE / LOCAL
• Two status lights indicate the location of output control as
pre-determined by the power sources auto-configure system.
• The LOCAL display will be lit when control is at the power
source.
• The REMOTE display will be lit when a remote pot/control
is detected.
These Output Control configurations can be overridden
(switched) with the CONTROL push button. When changed,
the unit will power up in the configuration it was in when it
was last powered down.
CC-STICK CRISP:The Stick Crisp mode features continuous control from 5 to 425 amps. This mode was
intended primarily for pipe welding applications.
• The Hot Start control regulates the starting current at
arc initiation. Hot Start can adjust starting current up
or down by 25% of the preset value. The recommended setting for Hot Start is 5 where the initial current is equal to the preset current.
Hidden Middle Control Panel – Mode Panel
FIGURE B.1.
2
1
5
6
A MPS
3
V OLTS
CONTROL
WELD TERMINALS
REMOTE
REMOTE
LOCAL
4
REMOTE
REMOTE
ON
OUTPUT
SELECT
7
SELECT
HOT
HO
T STAR
START
CC-STICK SOFT 7018
ARC CONTROL
CONTROL
6
-2
8
1
SELECT
9
0
10
11
0
+2
-4
+4
-8
+8
7
2
CV-WIRE
CV-WIRE
CV-FLUX
CV
-FLUX CORED
5
4
3
CC-STICK CRISP 6010
TIG GT
GTAW
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
B-3
-6
+6
-10
SOFT
+10
CRISP
8
9
12
10
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
B-4
OPERATION
• The Arc Control regulates the Arc Force to adjust the
short circuit current. The minimum setting (-10) will
produce a "soft" arc and will produce minimal spatter. The maximum setting (+10) will produce a "crisp"
arc and will minimize electrode sticking.
TIG GTAW: The TIG mode features continuous control
from 5 to 425 amps. The TIG mode can be run in either
the TIG touch start or high frequency (optional equipment required) assisted start mode.
• The Hot Start control selects the starting mode
desired. A setting of less than 5, the TIG lift start
mode is selected. The OCV is controlled below 10v
and the short circuit "TIG touch" current is maintained at 25 amps independent of the preset current.
When the tungsten is lifted, an arc is initiated and
the output is regulated at the preset value. Hot start
settings between 0 and 5 regulate the arc initiation
current. A setting of 5 results in the most positive arc
initiation. A setting of 0 reduces hot start.
• Hot Start settings between 5 and 10, select high frequency assisted starting TIG mode. In this range,
the OCV of the machine is controlled between 50
and 70 volts. If using the Lincoln K930-1 TIG
Module, set the Hot start to 10 for maximum OCV.
CV-WIRE: The CV-WIRE mode features continuous
control from 10 to 40 volts. The mode was intended for
most GMAW, FCAW, and MCAW applications.
• The Hot Start control is not used in the CV-WIRE
mode.
• The Arc Control regulates pinch effect. At the minimum setting (-10), minimizes pinch and results in a
soft arc. Low pinch settings are preferable for welding with gas mixes containing mostly inert gases. At
the maximum setting (+10), maximizes pinch effect
and results in a crisp arc. High pinch settings are
preferable for welding FCAW and GMAW with CO2.
CV-INNERSHEILD: The CV-INNERSHEILD mode
features continuous control from 10 to 45 volts. This
mode was designed for self-shielded flux cored wires
that require tight voltage control.
• The Hot Start control is not active in the CV-FLUX
CORED mode.
• The Arc Control regulates pinch effect. At the minimum setting (-10), minimizes pinch and results in a
soft arc. At the maximum setting (+10), maximizes
pinch effect and results in a crisp arc. Most selfshielded wires work well at an Arc Control setting of 5.
• The Arc Control is not used in the TIG mode.
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
TIG SOLENOID OPTION
Return to Section TOC
B-4
The Solenoid only operates when the V350 is in the
TIG mode. If the Weld Terminals are in “Remote” then
the solenoid will open when the arc start switch is
closed. The solenoid will close after the arc switch has
been opened and the post flow time expired.
If the Weld Terminals are turned “ON”, then the solenoid will open when the electrode is touched to the
work. The electrode needs to remain in contact with
the work to allow for gas coverage before attempting to
start the arc. The solenoid will close after the arc has
been broken and the post flow time expired.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
B-5
B-5
OPERATION
• Pulsed Modes
In Pulse Modes;
The work point will be in the Amps window and
should be set close to the wire feed speed of the
wire feeder in inches per minute. The Volts window
will have SPd displayed indicating Wire Feed
Speed. Once current starts flowing and during the 5
second “Hold” feature the displays will show amps
and volts.
7A. ADVANCED PROCESS PANEL
(See Figure B.2)
To program Welding modes. SELECT knob is used to
Scroll through all Welding modes. The MEMORY button is used to store and access Welding modes into
locations M1 thru M8.
Modes:
In addition to the 5 welding modes described in SECTION 7, the Advanced Process Panel allows you to
select the Following additional modes.
Pulse Mode features that are displayed while selecting a Welding pulse mode are listed below;
Steel - .030, .035, .045, .052 – Argon Blends
Stainless Steel - .030, .035, .045 – Argon Blends &
Helium/Argon Blends
Aluminum - .035, 3/64, 1/16 – 4043 & 5356
Metal Core - .045, .052 – Argon Blends
Nickel - .035, .045 – Argon/Helium blends
• Power Mode
In the Power Mode;
The work point will be in the Volts window. The Amp
window will have CP displayed indicating Constant
Power. Once current starts flowing and during the 5
second “Hold” feature the displays will show Volts
and Amps respectively. Refer to the detailed explanation at the end of this section.
Refer to the detailed explanation at the end of this
section.
• Gouge
Air Carbon Arc Cutting (CAC-A) is a physical means
of removing base metal or weld metal by using a carbon electrode, an electric arc and compressed air.
ADVANCED PROCESS PANEL VERSION
FIGURE B.2
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
OUTPUT KNOB
A MPS
V OLTS
CONTROL
WELD TERMINALS
REMOTE
LOCAL
OUTPUT
SELECT
MEMORY
7A
REMOTE
ON
SELECT
SELECT
SELECT
ADJUST
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
MEMORY BUTTON
(M1 THRU M8)
ADJUST KNOB
(0 THRU 10-HOT START)
(-10 THRU 0 AND
0 THRU +10-ARC CONTROL)
SELECT KNOB
(SCOLLS WELDING PROCESSES)
SELECT BUTTON
ON
(HOT START OR ARC CONTROL)
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
B-6
OPERATION
CONTROLS: (See Figure B.2.)
The MEMORY button and SELECT knob are used
together to select a welding process and store it in
memory (M1 thru M8). The SELECT knob scrolls
through the, welding process modes and memory M1
thru M8. The MEMORY button stores the welding
process in memory.
• SELECT button" (The right button) selects between
the "Hot Start" or "Arc Control". The < will indicate the
active feature shown below.
Right Digital Window
"Hot Start"
(-10 to 0 +10)
"Arc Control" (0 to 10) <
• The ADJUST knob adjusts the desired settings for
the Hot Start or Arc Control feature that is active.
WELDING PROCESS MODES AVAILABLE
Stick SMAW, TIG GTAW
Gouge CAG, CV MIG GMAW
CV Flux Core, Pulse MIG
ELECTRODE MATERIAL
Steel, Metal Core, Stainless, Aluminum, Nickel
The following example is how to select Pulse MIG
using .035 steel and store it into memory.
Return to Master TOC
5. After all adjustments have been made press and
hold the Memory button until the display changes.
The right and the left window will display what
memory to save in, lets say M1. To store in M1 push
the Memory button again to save the Pulse Mig
mode to memory M1.
6. The display in the digital windows will read as follows:
M1 Pulse MIG
Argon Blends
Steel .035
Arc Cntrl 1.2
7. Saving or entering a second welding mode to a
memory, M2. Turn the Select knob until the desired
welding process mode is displayed in right digital
window. Then follow steps 1 thru 6.
Press the Memory button till the digital window
reads,
Save to MEM
M2
Press the Memory button again and the New
Welding process is saved in M2.
8. Adjust the output control to the correct wire feed setting and the V350-PRO is ready to weld again.
(Note: The wire feed speed setting is not stored in
memory and will need to be reset.)
EXAMPLE OF SAVING WELDING MODES TO MEMORY
Return to Section TOC
B-6
1. Turn the Select knob until welding process is displayed.
LEFT WINDOW
RIGHT WINDOW
Pulse MIG
Argon Blends
Steel .035
2. Wait two seconds and the right window will display
Arc Control on the second line on the right side.
Pulse MIG
Argon Blends
Steel .035
Arc Cntrl ### <
9. Adjust the Arc Control and note that the M1 goes
away indicating that the V350-PRO settings no
longer match what is stored in memory. Going back
to the original settings will not bring the M1 back.
You will need to push the Memory button to recall
the original settings in M1.
Note: After all memory’s M1 thru M8 are used and the
welder needs to store another welding process, a new
welding process will overwrite what was originally in
the memory and will read,
Save to MEM
M1 Overwrite
M1 which stored Pulse Mig is Overwritten with the new
welding process.
LN-10/DH-10 Wire Feeder Compatibility Note:
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
3. SPd is displayed in the upper right Volts window.
The left Amps window matches the desired wire
feed speed that is set on the wire feeder. Adjust the
Output knob until desired number is displayed.
4. Start welding. If the arc length is too short turn the
Output knob up. If the arc length is too long turn the
Output knob down.
The Arc Control which is displayed in the right digital
window can be used to fine-tune the arc length and
characteristics.
The LN-10 and DH-10 feeders can be used to pulse
weld and in the power mode with the panel. The displays on the LN-10 & DH-10 do not show the wire feed
speed or power.
8. HOT START and ARC CONTROL features
have different functions depending on the welding
Mode that is active. Each feature is described under
the welding mode heading. (See Item 7 or 7.A for
specified Mode Operations) (See Figure B.1 or B.2)
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
B-7
OPERATION
B-7
WELD MODE DETAILS:
Mode
Range
Comments
Stick Soft
5 - 425 amps
The stick soft mode is the best selection for general stick
applications.
Arc Control = Arc Force
Hot Start = Initial hot start current (min = start a match set amps, Max.
= greatest hot start current) During hot start, arc force is set
at high and is fast response.
For gouging applications: Turn current up to 425 amps.
Stick Crisp
5 - 425 amps
The stick crisp mode features an aggressive arc force routine well suited for Exx10, Exx11 series electrodes.
Arc Control = Arc Force
Hot Start = Initial hot start current (Mid range = welding current and will
vary up and down with knobcontrol.) During hot start, arc
force is set at high and is fast response.
For gouging applications: Turn current up to 425 amps.
GTAW (Tig mode)
5 - 425 amps
The tig mode produces a soft, steady constant current waveform for
either touch start or high frequency assisted start DC GTAW applications.
Hot Start = Min to Mid range = Touch start with low OCV
Mid to Max range = High frequency assistedstarting with adjustable
OCV up to 70 volts.
GMAW - CV
10 - 45 volts
The GMAW - CV mode is the best selection for general MIG welding,
Metal core, and gas shielded applications.
Arc Control = Pinch (Min = min pinch, softest arc),
(Max = max pinch, crispest arc)
FCAW-SS
10 - 45 volts
The FCAW-SS mode is designed for Self Shielded Innershield products
that require tight voltage control. For example; the NR 203 series or NR
207)
Arc Control = Pinch (Min = min pinch, softest arc),
(Max = max pinch, crispest arc, )
ADVANCED PULSE PANEL WELDING PROGRAMS
Gouging
GMAW - Power
60 - 425 amps The gouging mode is a low power version of other Lincoln welding
equipment gouging programs, for example a PowerWave 455.
1 - 18 (No Units) Refer to the detailed explanation at the end of this section.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
This mode does not allow preset voltage. In the short arc GMAW
mode, the set KW will not equal the actual Volts * Amps. The set
power is regulated only when an arc is present. During shorting, the
output is allowed to increase to clear the short.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
B-8
OPERATION
B-8
PULSE PROGRAMS:
MODE
.030 Steel
.035 Steel
.045 Steel
.052 Steel
.045 Metal Core
.052 Metal Core
.030 Stainless Ar Blends
.030 Stainless He Ar CO2
.035 Stainless Ar Blends
.035 Stainless He Ar CO2
.045 Stainless Ar Blends
.045 Stainless He Ar CO2
.035 Aluminum 4043
.035 Aluminum 5356
3/64 Aluminum 4043
3/64 Aluminum 5356
1/16 Aluminum 4043
1/16 Aluminum 5356
Range (IPM*)
65 - 1200
55 - 800
50 - 700
75 - 550
50 - 650
50 - 500
85 - 770
110 - 770
65 - 770
75 - 770
50 - 600
50 - 600
100 - 700
115 - 740
80 - 550
85 - 700
75 - 325
75 - 450
COMMENTS
The V350 pulse programs are non-synergic and allow independent
control of the wire feed speed (at the wire feeder) and the arc
length. The Output Control Knob on the V350, adjusts an "SPD"
value. Similar to trim, the "SPD" value indicates the relative arc
length setting. The "SPD" value displayed on the V350 may not
match the actual wire feed speed! The value of "SPD" is meant
to be a point at which to set the arc length relative to the wire feed
speed and should be set the same as actual speed for a starting
point. Depending on the application, the "SPD" value can be adjusted to obtain the desired arc length. Refer to the detailed explanation at the end of this section.
The operation of the Arc Control knob on the V350 is similar to the
PowerWave series. As Arc Control is increased, the frequency is
increased and the background reduced. Decreasing Arc Control will
reduce frequency and increase background current. Arc Control
acts to fine tune the arc plasma to the specific application.
Preferred gas selections:
Steel Argon Blends = Argon with CO2 additions from 2 to 20
% or Oxygen additions from 2 to 5%.
Stainless Argon Blends = Argon with Oxygen additions up to 2%.
2%
Stainless He Ar CO2 = ~ 90% Helium, 7 1/2 % Argon 2 1/2 CO2
Aluminum 100% Argon
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
.035 Nickel Alloys (Non Adaptive)
.045 Nickel Alloys (Non Adaptive)
80 - 700
75 - 550
The Nickel Alloy pulse programs are non adaptive. The operator
sets the output control knob to deliver the correct arc length at
desired wire feed speed and stick out. While welding, the operator
manipulates the stick out to maintain the correct arc length. This
method of operation produces very stable arc performance considering the nature of nickel alloys.
Preferred gas: Argon/Helium Blends = for the best results add
helium to the argon base from 0-25%.
PULSE ON PULSE
.035
3/64
.035
3/64
4043
4043
5356
5356
(4x
(4x
(5x
(5x
Pulse
Pulse
Pulse
Pulse
on
on
on
on
Pulse) 120 - 600
Pulse) 85 - 400
Pulse) 130 - 700
Pulse) 100 - 550
Arc Control = Pulse on Pulse frequency. For faster travel
speed welds, the arc control should be increased.
For larger puddle, slower travel speeds, the arc control
should be decreased. Refer to the detailed explanation at the
end of this section.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
*IPM (INCHES PER MINUTE)
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
B-9
OPERATION
LOWER CASE PANEL
The output studs, line switch and remote connector are
located on the lower case front.
9. Both terminals are "Twist-Mate" connectors.
The Negative terminal is configured to accept the
pass through gas system.
10. The METER POLARITY switch is located above
the output connectors. The switch provides a work
connection for wire feeder voltmeters. Place the
switch in the position of the electrode polarity indicated by the decal. The switch does not change
the welding polarity.
11. 6-pin MS-style connector for remote control.
12. 14-pin MS-style connector for wire feeder connection and remote control.
REMOTE CONTROL of the OUTPUT CONTROL and
WELD TERMINALS
The Invertec V350-Pro has auto sensing of remote output controls. If after connecting or removing a remote,
the Invertec V350-Pro did not configure the way you
would like the local or remote control settings can be
changed by pushing the OUTPUT CONTROL or
WELD TERMINAL button. (A user cannot select
between the 6 and 14 pin MS-style connectors.)
CV modes
• The remote will default to the 14-pin MS-style connector if a remote is connected. If no remote is connected to the 14-pin MS-style connector then the
remote will default to the 6-pin MS-style connector if
a remote is connected to it.
• In all of the CV modes, the WELD TERMINAL control will default to REMOTE.
TIG mode
• The remote will default to the 6-pin MS-style if a
remote control is connected to the 6-pin MS-style
and to the 14-pin MS-style connector. If a remote is
not connected to the 6-pin MS-style connector then
the remote will default to the 14-pin MS-style connector if a remote is connected.
• If a remote control is connected to any of the MSstyle connectors the WELD TERMINAL control will
default to REMOTE. If there are not any remote control devices attached the WELD TERMINAL control
will default to ON.
CC-Stick modes
• The remote will default to only the 6-pin MS-style
connector if a remote is connected to it.
• The WELD TERMINAL control will default to ON with
or without a remote connected.
B-9
Types of Remote OUTPUT CONTROL
• The Invertec V350-Pro’s Output Control can be controlled by either a potentiometer connected between
77 & 75 with the wiper connected to 76 or a 0V to
10V DC supply connected between 76 & 75. (76
needs to be positive)
• 14-Pin Ms-style connector lead 75 is pin G, lead 76
is pin F and lead 77 is pin E.
• 6-Pin Ms-style connector lead 75 is pin C, lead 76 is
pin B and lead 77 is pin A.
Potentiometer Control
• The total resistance should be between 2000 ohms
(2K) and 10,000 ohms (10K)
• The machine output will be at minimum when lead
76 (wiper) is at the end of the potentiometer that is
connected to 75. The machine’s output will increase
as the wiper of the potentiometer is moved to the end
that is connected to 77. (Note: In TIG mode, moving
the lead 76 (wiper) to lead 77 would produce the current that has been set by the Invertec V350-Pro’s
front panel Output Control.)
• Remotes of this type offered by Lincoln Electric are
the K857, K812 and K870.
Voltage Control
• The supply must be an isolated supply. (Not referenced to earth ground, any auxiliary power from the
Invertec V350-Pro or the welding output) The supply
should be capable of supplying at least 20mA.
• 0 volts supplied to 76 will set the Invertec V350-Pro
to minimum output for the mode that has been
selected while 10 volts supplied to 76 will set the
Invertec V350-Pro to the maximum output for the
mode. (Note: In TIG mode, 10 volts supplied to lead
76 would produce the current that has been set by
the Invertec V350-Pro’s front panel Output Control.)
Types of Remote WELD TERMINAL Control
• The Invertec V350-Pro’s Weld Terminals can be controlled from each of the MS-style connectors. The
circuit has a nominal OCV of 15VDC and requires a
dry contact closure (less than 100 ohms) to activate
the output of the Invertec V350-Pro.
• 14-Pin MS-style connector, the Weld Terminals are
controlled from pin C (lead 2) and pin D (lead 4). Pin
C is positive.
• 6-Pin MS-style connector, the Weld Terminals are
controlled from pin D (lead 2) and pin E (lead 4). In
the 6-pin MS-style connector pin D is positive.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
B-10
OPERATION
AUXILIARY POWER
• 115VAC, 42VAC and 24VAC power is available from
the 14-pin MS-style connector. The Construction
model of the Invertec V350-Pro does not have the
14-pin MS-style connector) These supplies are
intended to supply power for auxiliary equipment like
wire feeders and the TIG Module.
• 115VAC supply is rated at 2 amps and is protected by a 3.5
amp breaker.
• 42 VAC supply is rated at 5.5 amps and is protected
by a 6 amp breaker.
• 24 VAC supply is rated at 5.5 amps and is protected
by a 6 amp breaker.
LIMITATIONS
• The V350-Pro is not recommended for processes
other than those listed.
• The V350-Pro can only be used with the recommended equipment and options.
RECOMMENDED PROCESSES
Properly equipped, the Invertec V350-Pro supports
GMAW-P, FCAW, SMAW, GTAW and CAC-A
processes for a variety of materials, including mild
steel, stainless steel, cored wires, and aluminum.
V350-PRO
B-10
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
B-11
B-11
OPERATION
SPECIAL WELDING PROCESSES
AVAILABLE ON THIS MACHINE
• For steel, use 75/25 Ar/CO2 shield gas.
POWER MODE™
• For Aluminum, use 100% Ar.
• For Stainless, select a Helium blend Tri-Mix.
The Power Mode™ process was developed by Lincoln
to maintain a stable and smooth arc at low procedure
settings which are needed to weld thin metal without
pop-outs or burning-through. For Aluminum welding, it
provides excellent control and the ability to maintain
constant arc length. This results in improved welding
performance in two primary types of applications.
Start by setting the wire feed speed based upon material thickness and appropriate travel speed. Then
adjust the Output knob as follows:
• For steel, listen for the traditional “frying egg”
sound of a good short-arc MIG procedure to know
you have the process set correctly.
• Short Arc MIG at low procedure settings.
• For aluminum, simply adjust the Output knob until
the desired arc length is obtained.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
• Aluminum MIG welding.
Note the Volts display is simply a relative number and
DOES NOT correspond to voltage.
Power Mode™ is a method of high speed regulation of
the output power whenever an arc is established. It
provides a fast response to changes in the arc. The
higher the Power Mode Setting, the longer the arc. If a
welding procedure is not established, the best way to
determine the Power Mode Setting is by experimentation until the desired output result is established.
Some procedure recommendations appear in the table
below.
In the Power Mode variables need to be set:
Setting up a Power Mode procedure is similar to setting a CV MIG procedure. Select a shielding gas
appropriate for a short arc process.
Recommended Welding Procedures for Power Mode
Aluminum 4043
Aluminum 5356
Mild Steel
Mild Steel
Mild Steel
Mild Steel
Mild Steel
Mild Steel
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
WIRE
E4043
E5356
L56
L56
L56
L56
L56
L56
E308L
E308L
WIRE SIZE
0.035
0.035
0.025
0.025
0.030
0.030
0.035
0.035
0.030
0.035
GAS
100% Ar.
100% Ar.
100% CO2
75/25% Ar/CO2
100% CO2
75/25% Ar/CO2
100% CO2
75/25% Ar/CO2
Tri-mix
Tri-mix
WFS / POWER MODE SETTING
MATERIAL
MATERIAL THICKNESS
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
• Wire Feed Speed
• Output
• Arc Control
22 ga.
125 / 2.25
125 / 1.75
Not Recommended
100 / 0.8
Not Recommended
90 / 1.0
20 ga.
150 / 2.5
150 / 2.3
120 / 1.0
120 / 1.0
100 / 0.7
100 / 1.0
80 / 1.5
50 / 0.5
18 ga.
200 / 3.75
200 / 3.0
140 / 1.7
140 / 1.5
110 / 1.5
110 / 1.5
100 / 2.5
100 / 2.5
110 / 2.0
110 / 2.0
16 ga.
300 / 7.75
300 / 6.85
190 / 2.0
190 / 2.0
125 / 2.0
125 / 2.0
125 / 3.0
125 / 3.0
140 / 2.5
130 / 2.7
14 ga.
400 / 9.0
400 / 7.5
260 / 3.0
260 / 3.0
160 / 2.3
160 / 2.3
160 / 3.8
160 / 3.5
210 / 3.0
190 / 3.5
12 ga.
450 / 9.5
450 / 8.0
330 / 5.0
330 / 4.5
230 / 3.5
230 / 3.5
200 / 5.0
200 / 4.5
270 / 5.0
230 / 6.0
10 ga.
500 / 10.0
500 / 8.5
300 / 6.0
300 / 6.0
240 / 6.5
240 / 7.0
325 / 6.5
300 / 7.0
3/16
600 / 11.25
600 / 9.5
400 / 7.5
400 / 7.0
1/4
700 / 11
V350-PRO
B-12
OPERATION
PULSE WELDING (GMAW-P)
The pulsed-arc process is, by definition, a spray transfer process wherein spray transfer occurs in pulses at
regularly spaced intervals. In the time between pulses,
the welding current is reduced and no metal transfer
occurs.
Pulsed-arc transfer is obtained by operating a power
source between low and high current levels. The high
current level or “pulse” forces an electrode drop to the
workpiece. The low current level or “background” maintains the arc between pulses. (See Figure below).
Pulsed MIG is an advanced form of welding that takes
the best of all the other forms of transfer while minimizing or eliminating their disadvantages. Unlike short circuit, pulsed MIG does not create spatter or run the risk
of cold lapping. The welding positions in pulsed MIG are
not limited as they are with globular or spray and its wire
use is definitely more efficient. Unlike the spray arc
process, pulsing offers controlled heat input that allows
better welding on thin materials, lower wire feed speeds
and leads to less distortion and improved overall quality
and appearance. This is especially important with stainless, nickel and other alloys that are sensitive to heat
input.
In GMAW-P mode, arc control adjusts the background
current and frequency of the wave. When arc control
goes up, the frequency increases thus increasing the
droplet transfer.
EACH PULSE DELIVERS ONE DROPLET OF WELD MATERIAL
PEAK AMPS
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
B-12
FREQUENCY
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
SPRAY TRANSITION
CURRENT
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
B-13
B-13
OPERATION
When Arc Control is used in the Pulse on Pulse modes,
it does the same things it does in the other pulsed
modes: decreasing the Arc Control decreases the
droplet transfer and weld deposition rate. Increasing
the Arc Control increases the droplet transfer and weld
deposition rate. Since Arc Control varies weld droplet
transfer rate, the Arc Control can be used to vary the
ripple spacing in the weld bead.
PULSE-ON-PULSE™ (GMAW-PP)
Pulse on Pulse™ is a Lincoln process specifically
designed for use in welding relatively thin (less than
1/4" thick) aluminum (See the table below). It gives
weld beads with very consistent uniform ripple.
In Pulse on Pulse modes, two distinct pulse types are
used, instead of the single pulse type normally used in
GMAW-P. A number of high energy pulses are used to
obtain spray transfer and transfer metal across the arc.
Such pulses are shown in the figure below. After a
number "N" of such pulses, depending on the wire feed
speed used, an identical number "N" of low energy
pulses are performed. These low energy pulses,
shown in the figure below, do not transfer any filler
metal across the arc and help to cool the arc and keep
the heat input low.
BENEFITS OF PULSE ON PULSE FROM
LINCOLN ELECTRIC
• Excellent appearance of the weld bead
• Improved cleaning action
• Reduced porosity
"N" PULSES
Table B.2 shows WFS and Trim settings for common
aluminum types and wire sizes when welding with
Pulse-on-Pulse. The welds made to obtain the values
in the table were fillet welds in the flat position. The values in the table can be helpful as a starting point to
establish a welding procedure. From there, adjustments need to be made to set the proper procedure for
each specific application (out-of-position, other types
of joints, etc.).
"N" PULSES
HIGH HEAT
PULSES
LOW HEAT
PULSES
PEAK
AMPS
BACKGROUND
AMPS
TIME
The Peak Current, Background Current, and
Frequency are identical for the high energy and low
energy pulses. In addition to cooling the weld down,
the major effect of the low energy pulses is that they
form a weld ripple. Since they occur at very regular
time intervals, the weld bead obtained is very uniform
with a very consistent ripple pattern. In fact, the bead
has its best appearance if no oscillation of the welding
gun ("whipping") is used.(See the figure below)
The comments on the table below show values of WFS
below which it is not recommended to weld. The reason is, that below these values the weld transfer will
change from a spray arc to a short-arc, which is not
advisable when welding aluminum.
Aluminum 4043
Aluminum 5356
Aluminum 5356
100% Ar.
100% Ar.
100% Ar.
100% Ar.
WIRE
E4043
E4043
E5356
E5356
WIRE SIZE
0.035
3/64
0.035
3/64
250 / 0
200 / 0
230 / 0
225 / 0
10 ga.
400 / 0
280 / 0
425 / 0
400 / 0
3/16
550 / 0
340 / 0
670 / 0
500 / 0
1/4
600 / 0
400 / 0
700 / 0
550 / 0
WFS /
ARC CONTROL
Aluminum 4043
GAS
MATERIAL
THICKNESS
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
WELDING PROCEDURES FOR PULSE-ON-PULSE
MATERIAL
14 ga.
COMMENTS
Not Recommended
below 200 WFS
Not Recommended
below 100 WFS
V350-PRO
Not Recommended
below 200 WFS
Not Recommended
below 200 WFS
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
B-14
NOTES
V350-PRO
B-14
Return to Master TOC
C-1
C-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
- ACCESSORIES SECTION Accessories...........................................................................................................................Section C
Cobramatic & Tig Module Connection Instructions ...................................................................C-2
Options/Accessories...................................................................................................................C-2
Quick Disconnect Plugs .............................................................................................................C-3
Connection of Lincoln Electric Wire Feeders............................................................C-4 Thru C-11
V350-PRO/LN-25 with Optional 6 Pin K441-1 Remote.......................................................C-4
V350-PRO/LN-25 with Optional 6 Pin K857 Remote ..........................................................C-5
V350-PRO/LN-25 with K867 Adapter ..................................................................................C-7
V350-PRO/LN-7 with K480 Control Cable ..........................................................................C-8
V350-PRO/LN-7 with K867 Adapter ....................................................................................C-9
V350-PRO/LN-742 .............................................................................................................C-10
V350-PRO/LN-10 with K1505 Control Cable ....................................................................C-11
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
LN-25 with K431 Remote Option.........................................................................................C-6
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
C-2
ACCESSORIES
"CE" Version – K1728-3
Cobramatic Connection Instructions
A Cobramatic can only be used with a Factory or
"CE" version of the V350
1. Turn the Invertec power switch "off"
2. Connect the control cable from the Cobramatic to
the 24/42 VAC 14-pin wire feeder amphenol on
the rear of the Invertec.
3. Connect the electrode cable to the output terminal
of the polarity required by electrode. Connect the
work lead to the other terminal.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
4. Set the meter polarity switch on the front of the
Invertec to coincide with wire feeder polarity used.
5. If a remote control such as K857 is to be used
with the Cobramatic, the remote can be connected
directly to the 6pin amphenol on the front of the
Invertec or use a K864 adapter to connect the
cobramatic and the remote to the 24/42VAC 14pin wire feeder amphenol connector on the rear of
the Invertec.
TIG Module K930-2
The TIG Module connects to the V350-Pro Factory or
CE versions with a K936-1 (9-14 pin) control cable.
Connect the K936-1 to the 115VAC Wire Feeder
Amphenol on the rear of the V350-Pro.
The TIG Module can also be used with the V350
Construction version. A K936-4 control cable is
required to supply 115VAC to the TIG Module from an
external 115VAC supply.
General Instructions for Connection of Wire
Feeders to V350-Pro
Wire feeders other than LN-7 and LN-25 may be used
provided that the auxiliary power supply capacity of
the V350-Pro is not exceeded. K867 universal
adapter plug is required. See connection diagram
S19406 and S19386 at the back of this manual for
more information.
Remote Control of Invertec
Remote Control K857, Hand Amptrol K963 and Foot
Amptrol K870.
Return to Master TOC
OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES
Return to Section TOC
C-2
• The "CE" version is the Factory version with the
addition of power line filtering allowing the machine
to comply with the European and Australian EMC
emission requirements.
Field Installed Options/Accessories
Two versions of the V350-Pro are available from the
factory for both the CE and ROW versions.
Options for K1728-1 Factory and K1728-3 "CE"
V350’s
• TIG Gas Control Kit – K1762-2
• Advanced Process Panel – K1763-1
Options for all models of V350-PRO
• Undercarriage – K1764-1
• Valet Style Undercarriage - K1838-1
Welding Cable Connectors:
• K852-70 1/0-2/0 cable
• K852-95 2/0-3/0 cable
FACTORY VERSION and
ADVANCED PROCESS VERSION
K857
Remote Output Control
K814
Arc Start Switch
K812
Hand Operated Amptrol
K870
Foot Operated Amptrol
Note: All of the above remote controls connect directly
to the 6-pin MS-style connector, with either a K864 or
K876 adapter and connect it to the 14 pin wire feeder
MS-style connector. (See Diagram in Section F-1)
K930-[ ]
TIG Module
K428, K446, K449
LN-25 *
K617 (-1 or -2) K618 (-1 or -2)
LN-742
K440 (-1), K567-1
LN-7 GMA
K1559-1, K1564-1
LN-10
K1499-1, K1521-1
DH-10
K1587-1
Cobramatic
*Not recommended for pulse welding
Construction Version – K1728-2
• All welding modes for this model run with local output control and weld terminals ON (e.g. Stick, TIG,
LN25 off the arc).
K930-1
TIG Module
K428,K446, K449
LN-25(Off the Arc)
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
C-3
ACCESSORIES
QUICK DISCONNECT PLUGS
A quick disconnect system is used for the welding
cable connections. The K852-70 is designed to
accept a welding cable size of 1/0 to 2/0.
1. Remove 25mm (1 in.) of welding cable insulation.
2. Slide rubber boot onto cable end. The boot end
may be trimmed to match the cable diameter.
Soap or other lubricant will help to slide the boot
over the cable.
BOOT
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
WELDING CABLE
25 mm
TRIM
1 in.
3. Slide the copper tube into the brass plug.
4. Insert cable into copper tube.
SET SCREW
BRASS PLUG
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
COPPER TUBE
5. Tighten set screw to collapse copper tube. Screw
must apply pressure against welding cable. The
top of the set screw will be well below the surface
of the brass plug after tightening.
6. Slide rubber boot over brass plug. The rubber
boot must be positioned to completely cover all
electrical surfaces after the plug is locked into the
receptacle.
V350-PRO
C-3
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
C-4
C-4
ACCESSORIES
CONNECTION OF LINCOLN ELECTRIC WIRE FEEDERS
CONNECTION OF THE LN-25 TO THE
V350-PRO “ACROSS THE ARC” WITH
OPTIONAL 6 PIN K441-1 REMOTE CONTROL.
4. Set the voltmeter switch to the electrode polarity
chosen.
5. Set “CONTROL SELECT” to “REMOTE”.
6. Set the “MODE” to the “CV-WIRE” position.
7. Set “WELD TERMINALS SELECT” to the “ON”
CAUTION
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.
2. Connect the electrode cable to the output terminal
of polarity required by the electrode. Connect the
work lead to the other terminal. Welding cable
must be sized for current and duty cycle of the
application.
3. Attach the single lead from the LN-25 control box
to the work using the spring clip on the end of the
lead. This is only a control lead - it carries no
welding current.
position.
If you are using an LN-25 without an internal contactor, the electrode will be “HOT” when the V350PRO is energized.
8. Set the “ARC CONTROL” to the “O” position and
then adjust to suit.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Figure C.1 V350-PRO/LN-25 ACROSS THE ARC CONNECTION DIAGRAM
6 pin
Amphenol
Optional K444-1
Remote Control
+
LN-25
Wire Feeder
-
Work Clip Lead
To Work
To Work
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Electrode Cable
NOTE: Illustration shows electrode connected for negative polarity.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
C-5
ACCESSORIES
CONNECTION OF THE LN-25 TO THE
V350-PRO “ACROSS THE ARC” WITH
OPTIONAL 6 PIN K857 REMOTE CONTROL.
Return to Master TOC
5. Set the voltmeter switch to the electrode polarity
chosen.
6. Set “CONTROL SELECT” to “REMOTE”.
7. Set the “MODE” to the “CV-WIRE” position.
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.
2. Connect the electrode cable to the output terminal
of polarity required by the electrode. Connect the
work lead to the other terminal. Welding cable
must be sized for current and duty cycle of the
application.
3. Connect the K857 remote control to the 6-pin
amphenol on the V350-PRO.
Return to Section TOC
C-5
4. Attach the single lead from the LN-25 control box
to the work using the spring clip on the end of the
lead. This is only a control lead - it carries no
welding current.
8. Set “WELD TERMINALS SELECT” to the “ON”
position.
CAUTION
If you are using an LN-25 without an internal contactor, the electrode will be “HOT” when the V350PRO is energized.
9. Set the “ARC CONTROL” to the “O” position and
then adjust to suit.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Figure C.2 V350-PRO/LN-25 ACROSS THE ARC CONNECTION DIAGRAM WITH K857
REMOTE CONTROL
K857
Remote Control
6 pin
Amphenol
+
LN-25
Wire Feeder
-
Work Clip Lead
To Work
To Work
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Electrode Cable
NOTE: Illustration shows electrode connected for negative polarity.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
C-6
C-6
ACCESSORIES
CONNECTION OF THE LN-25 WITH K431
REMOTE OPTION TO THE V350-PRO.
NOTE: AN LN-25 CAN ONLY BE USED WITH A FACTORY OR “CE” VERSION OF THE V350-PRO.
6. Set the “MODE” to the “CV-WIRE” position.
7. Set “WELD TERMINALS
“REMOTE” position.
SELECT”
to
8. Set the “ARC CONTROL” to the “O” position and
then adjust to suit.
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.
2. Connect the electrode cable to the output terminal
of polarity required by the electrode. Connect the
work lead to the other terminal. Welding cable
must be sized for current and duty cycle of the
application.
3. Attach the single lead from the LN-25 control box
to the work using the spring clip on the end of the
lead. This is only a control lead - it carries no
welding current.
9. Connect the K432 remote control cable to the LN25.
10. Connect the K876 adapter to the K432 and to the
24/42VAC 14-pin amphenol located at the rear of
the V350-PRO.
11. Adjust the wire feed speed and voltage at the LN25.
4. Set the voltmeter switch to the electrode polarity
chosen.
NOTE: See Figure C.4 for connection Using K867
adapter.
5. Set “CONTROL SELECT” to “REMOTE”.
Figure C.3 LN-25 with K431 Remote Option to the V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
ELECTRODE CABLE
TO LN-25
TO
WORK
14 PIN (24/42VAC)
AMPHENOL
6 PIN AMPHENOL
LN-25 WITH
K431 OPTION
+
K876 ADAPTER
K432 REMOTE
CONTROL CABLE
INVERTEC
POWER SOURCE
Return to Master TOC
NOTE: Illustration shows electrode connected for positive polarity.
Return to Section TOC
the
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
C-7
C-7
ACCESSORIES
CONNECTION OF THE K867 ADAPTER
FOR USE WITH LN-25 WITH K431
OPTION/V350-PRO.
1. Insulate each unused lead individually.
2. Remove 6 pin plug from K432 cable in order to
connect K867 adapter.
3. Label each lead (A thru F) as they are removed
from the 6 pin plug.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
4. Splice leads and insulate.
Figure C.4 Connection of LN-25 to V350-PRO using K867 adapter.
21
82
81
42
ELECTRODE CABLE
TO LN-25
TO
WORK
14 PIN
(24/42VAC)
31
32
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
K867 ADAPTER
LN-25 WITH
K431 OPTION
GND
AMPHENOL
+
1
41
2
E
4
F
SPARE
D
75
A
76
B
77
C
INVERTEC
4
POWER SOURCE
V350-PRO
K432 REMOTE
CONTROL CABLE
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
C-8
C-8
ACCESSORIES
CONNECTION OF THE LN-7 TO THE V350PRO USING K480 CONTROL CABLE (SEE
FIGURE C.5)
3. Connect the input cable from the K480 control
cable to the (115VAC) 14 pin amphenol on the
V350-PRO and the input cable plug on the LN-7.
NOTE: AN LN-7 CAN ONLY BE USED WITH A FACTORY OR “CE” VERSION OF THE V350-PRO. IF
YOUR LN-7 COMES EQUIPPED WITH A K291 OR
K404 INPUT CABLE, REFER TO THE CONNECTION
OF THE LN-7 USING K867 UNIVERSAL ADAPTER.
4. Set the “VOLTMETER” switch to “+” or “-”
depending on the polarity chosen.
5. Set “CONTROL SELECT” to “REMOTE”.
6. Set the “MODE” to the “CV-WIRE” position.
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
2. Connect the electrode cable from the K480 control
cable to the “+” terminal of the welder and to the
LN-7 wire feeder. Connect the work cable to the
“-” terminal of the welder.
NOTE: Figure C.5 shows the electrode connected
for positive polarity. To change polarity, shut the
welder off and reverse the electrode and work
cables at the output terminals.
7. Place the “WELD TERMINALS SELECT” in the
“REMOTE” position.
8. Adjust wire feed speed at the LN-7 and adjust the
welding voltage with the optional remote control if
used.
9. Set the “ARC” control at “0” initially and adjust to
suit.
NOTE: Welding cable must be sized for current
and duty cycle of application.
Figure C.5 V350-PRO/LN-7 with K480 Control Cable Connection Diagram
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
TO LN-7 INPUT
14 PIN
AMPHENOL
(115VAC)
AT REAR OF
MACHINE
CABLE PLUG
OPTIONAL K857
REMOTE CONTROL
-
+
K480 CONTROL CABLE
6 PIN
AMPHENOL
ELECTRODE CABLE
TO WIRE FEED UNIT
TO WORK
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
C-9
C-9
ACCESSORIES
CONNECTION OF THE K867 ADAPTER
FOR USE WITH THE K291 OR K404 INPUT
CABLES AND LN-7.
1. Insulate each unused lead individually.
2. Splice leads and insulate.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Figure C.6 Connection of LN-7 to V350-PRO using K867 adapter.
SPARE
82
ELECTRODE CABLE
TO LN-7
TO
WORK
81
14 PIN(115VAC)
AMPHENOL
+
INVERTEC
POWER SOURCE
K867 UNIVERSAL
ADAPTER PLUG
BOX
42
41
31
31
32
32
2
2
4
4
21
21
GND
GND
75
75
76
76
77
77
GREEN
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
2
Return to Section TOC
LN-7
CONTROL
1
V350-PRO
K291 OR K404
INPUT CABLE
K775 OPTIONAL
REMOTE CONTROL
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
C-10
ACCESSORIES
CONNECTION OF THE LN-742 TO THE
V350-PRO (SEE FIGURE C.7)
NOTE: AN LN-7 CAN ONLY BE USED WITH A FACTORY OR “CE” VERSION OF THE V350-PRO.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
4. Set the “VOLTMETER” switch to “+” or “-”
depending on the polarity chosen.
5. Set the “MODE” to the “CV-WIRE” position..
2. Connect the electrode cable from the LN-742 to
the “+” terminal of the welder. Connect the work
cable to the “-” terminal of the welder.
NOTE: Welding cable must be sized for current
and duty cycle of application.
6. Set “CONTROL SELECT” to “LOCAL”.
7. Place the “WELD TERMINALS SELECT” in the
“REMOTE” position.
8. Adjust wire feed speed at the LN-742.
9. Set the “ARC” control at “0” initially and adjust to
suit.
Figure C.7 V350-PRO/LN-742 Connection Diagram
TO LN-742 INPUT
14 PIN
AMPHENOL
(24/42VAC)
AT REAR OF
MACHINE
Return to Section TOC
3. Connect the K591 control cable to the 24/42VAC
14 pin amphenol on the back of the V350-PRO
and the input cable plug on the LN-742.
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.
NOTE: Figure C.7 shows the electrode connected
for positive polarity. To change polarity, shut the
welder off and reverse the electrode and work
cables at the output terminals.
Return to Section TOC
C-10
CABLE PLUG
+
-
K591 CONTROL CABLE
ELECTRODE CABLE
TO WIRE FEED UNIT
TO WORK
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
C-11
ACCESSORIES
CONNECTION OF THE LN-10 TO THE
V350-PRO USING THE K1505 CONTROL
CABLE.
NOTE: AN LN-10 CAN ONLY BE USED WITH A FACTORY OR “CE” VERSION OF THE V350-PRO.
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.
2. Connect the K1505 control cable from the LN-10
to the Invertec 24/42VAC 14 pin amphenol connecter on the rear of the V350-PRO.
Return to Master TOC
3. Connect the electrode cable to the output terminal
of polarity required by the electrode. Connect the
work lead to the other terminal.
Return to Section TOC
C-11
8. Set the “ARC CONTROL” to the “0” position and
then adjust to suit.
9. Set wire feed speed and voltage at the LN-10.
NOTE: The voltage set point displayed on the
V350-PRO should be ignored when operating in
the remote control mode with the LN-10.
10. See the LN-10 manual for details on accessing
the control DIP switch.
11. The control DIP switch inside the LN-10 should be
set per the instructions in the LN-10 manual.
4. Set the meter polarity switch on the front of the
V350-PRO to coincide with wire feeder polarity
used.
5. Set “CONTROL SELECT” to “REMOTE”.
6. Set the “MODE” to the “CV-WIRE” position..
7. Set the “WELD TERMINALS SELECT” to the
“REMOTE” position.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Figure C.8 LN-10 V350-PRO
TO LN-10
14 PIN
AMPHENOL
(24/42VAC)
AT REAR OF
MACHINE
+
-
K1505
TO WORK
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
ELECTRODE CABLE
TO LN-10
V350-PRO
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
C-12
NOTES
V350-PRO
C-12
Return to Master TOC
Section D-1
Section D-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
-MAINTENANCEMaintenance .........................................................................................................................Section D
Capacitor Discharge Procedure .................................................................................................D-2
Visual Inspection.........................................................................................................................D-2
Routine Maintenance..................................................................................................................D-2
Periodic Maintenance .................................................................................................................D-2
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Major Component Locations .....................................................................................................D-3
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
D-2
MAINTENANCE
D-2
VISUAL INSPECTION
WARNING
Have qualified personnel do the maintenance
work. Always use the greatest care when
working near moving parts.
Do not put your hands near the cooling blower
fan. If a problem cannot be corrected by
following the instructions, take the machine to
the nearest Lincoln Field Service Shop.
----------------------------------------------------------------------ELECTRIC SHOCK can kill.
• Do not touch electrically live parts or
electrode with skin or wet clothing.
• Insulate yourself from work and
ground
• Always wear dry insulating gloves.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
EXPLODING PARTS can cause
injury.
• Failed parts can explode or cause other
parts to explode when power is applied.
• Always wear a face shield and long
sleeves when servicing.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
See additional warning information
throughout this Operator’s Manual.
Clean interior of machine with a low pressure air
stream. Make a thorough inspection of all components. Look for signs of overheating, broken leads or
other obvious problems. Many problems can be
uncovered with a good visual inspection.
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
1. Every 6 months or so the machine should be
cleaned with a low pressure airstream. Keeping
the machine clean will result in cooler operation
and higher reliability. Be sure to clean these
areas:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
All printed circuit boards
Power switch
Main transformer
Input rectifier
Auxiliary Transformer
Reconnect Switch Area
Fan (Blow air through the rear louvers)
2. Examine the sheet metal case for dents or breakage.
Repair the case as required. Keep the case in good
condition to insure that high voltage parts are protected
and correct spacings are maintained. All external sheet
metal screws must be in place to insure case strength
and electrical ground continuity.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
CAPACITOR DISCHARGE PROCEDURE
1. Obtain a power resistor (25 ohms, 25 watts).
2. Hold resistor body with electrically insulated glove.
DO NOT TOUCH TERMINALS. Connect the resistor terminals across the two studs in the position
shown. Hold in each position for 1 second.
Repeat for all four capacitors.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
RESISTOR
CAPACITOR
TERMINALS
3. Use a DC voltmeter to check that voltage is not
present across the terminals on all four capacitors.
Overload Protection
The machine is electrically protected from producing
high output currents. Should the output current
exceed 430A, an electronic protection circuit will
reduce the current to approximately 100A. The
machine will continue to produce this low current until
the protection circuit is reset. Reset occurs when the
output load is removed.
Thermal Protection
Thermostats protect the machine from excessive
operating temperatures. Excessive temperatures may
be caused by a lack of cooling air or operating the
machine beyond the duty cycle and output rating. If
excessive operating temperature should occur, the
thermostat will prevent output voltage or current. The
meter will remain energized during this time.
Thermostats are self-resetting once the machine
cools sufficiently. If the thermostat shutdown was
caused by excessive output or duty cycle and the fan
is operating normally, the Power Switch may be left
on and the reset should occur within a 15 minute period.
V350-PRO
HO
F
OF
VO
LTS
PS
S
C CO
+8
+1
CR 0
ISP
+6
-10
SO
FT
0
L
-2
-8
RO
+4
Return to Master TOC
4
Return to Master TOC
V
R
WE
PO
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
6
+2
-6
9
-4
8
0
NT
1
1
A
3
Return to Section TOC
y qu co ism t
lor mm ali et eu
do nu a am h era
gn
am
um no
sit y nib qu
ma
ips m e lor
ali
dia lor do mm a
nu gn
rem ed do
Lo t, t um no ma
eli ree ips m e
lao rem dia lor
ed do
Lo t, t
eli ree
lao
SE
LE
CT
T ST
AR
T
4
D TE
RM
INAL
UT
A
A T
PR VIS TEN
EC O D TIO
AU E N
CIO
N
Return to Section TOC
!
W
WA ARN
IN
RN
G
IN
G
!
g
cin
pis
ut
adi
nt
er
g
idu
tetu
cin
tinc
pis
sec od
ut
adi
con sm
nt
er
t
et eui
idu
g
am h
era tetu tinc
cin
nib
sit
sec od
pis
uam
or my
ut
adi
con sm
g
nt
dol um aliq et
t
er
eui
cin
idu
um non gna am h
era tetu
pis
tinc
ips m ma sit
nib
ut
adi
uam sec od
nt
em dia ore or my
er
con
sm
idu
Lor , ed dol dol um aliq et
t tetu
eui
t um
tinc
non gna am h
erasec
elit
od
ree ips m ma
nib
sit
lao em dia
uamcon sm
g
t
ore or my
et eui
dol um aliq
Lor , ed dol
cin
am h
era
t
pis
um non gnasit
nib
elit
ut
ree ips
uam
adi
m maor
my
nt
lao
er
em dia oredol um aliq
idu
g
tetu
Lor , ed dolum non gna
tinc
cin
t ips m
sec od
pis
ma
elit
ut
ree
con sm
adi
em dia ore
g
nt
lao ed
t
et eui
er
cin
Lor ,
idu
t dol
am h
era tetu
pis
elit
tinc
ut
nib
sit
ree
adi
uam sec od
g
nt
or my
lao
er
cin
idu
dol um aliq con sm
g
tetu
t
et eui
pis
tinc
um non gna
ut
cin
sec od
am h
era
adi
nt
ips m ma
pis
nib
er
sit
con sm
ut
idu
adi
uam
em dia ore
or my
t tetu
et eui
nt
er
tinc
Lor , ed dol
dol um aliq
g
am h
erasec
idu
t
od
tetu
cin
nib
sit
elit
um
tinc
non gna
ree
uamcon sm
pis
or my
sec od
ips m ma
t
et
ut
lao
adi
dol um aliq h eui
con sm
nt
em dia ore
am
era
ing
er
t
et eui
um non gnasit
idu
nib
g
Lor , ed dol
sc
am h
era tetu tinc
t
uam
ips m maor my
cin
ipi ut
elit
nib
sit
sec od
ree
pis
em dia ore dol um aliq
ad t
uam
or my
ut
lao
adi
r un
con sm
Lor , ed dolum non gna
nt
ing
dol
aliq
t
t
er
et
um
ue cid
ips m ma
eui
idu
elit
sc
um non gna am h
ree
era tetu
tet tin
g
em dia ore
ipi ut
tinc
ips m ma sit
nib
lao
cin
ec
Lor , ed dol
uam sec od
ad t
em dia ore or my
t
pis
r un
ns od
con sm
elit
ut
Lor , ed dol dol um aliq et
adi
ree
t
co ism t ue cid
eui
nt
t um
er
lao
non gna am h
era
elit
et eu era tet tin
idu
ree ips m ma
nib
h
sit
tetu
ec od
tinc
lao
am
g
uam
dia
em
sec od
ore or my
am ns
cin
sit y nib qu co ism t
dol um aliq
Lor , ed dol
con sm
pis
t
um non gna
ut
t
et eui
lor mm ali et eu
elit
adi
ree ips
nt
am h
era
m ma
do nu a am h era
er
g
lao
idu
nib
sit
gn
em dia ore
cin
nib am
tetu
uam
um no
or my
sit y qu
tinc
pis
Lor , ed dol
ma
sec od
ut
t
dol um aliq
ips m e lor
adi
ali
elit
nt
con
ree
sm
er
um non gna
dia lor do mm a
idu
t
et eui
nu gn
lao
ips m ma
rem ed do
am h
era tetu tinc
Lo t, t um no ma
em dia ore
sec od
nib
sit
g
uamcon sm
eli ree ips m e
Lor , ed dol
or my
t
cin
t
dol um aliq et eui
elit
lao rem dia lor
pis
ree
era
ut
um non gna am h
ed do
adi
lao
nib
Lo t, t
nt
ips m ma sit
er
uam
or my
idu
eli ree
em dia ore dol
tetu
um aliq
tinc
Lor , ed dol
lao
sec od
t um non gna
ing
elit
con sm
ree ips m ma
sc
t
et eui
lao em dia ore
ipi ut
am h
era
Lor , ed dol
ad t
nib
sit
t
r un
elit
uam
or my
ing
ree
ue cid
dol um aliq
sc
lao
tet tin
ipi ut
um non gna
ec od
ad t
ips m ma
r un
ns
em dia ore
co ism t ue cid
Lor , ed dol
et eu era tet tin
t
h
elit
ec od
ree
am
nib am ns
lao
sit
5
3
AR
2
SE
LE
CT
10
TE
MO
RE
WEL
TP
OU
CC
-ST
ICK
CC
70
-ST
18
ICK
TIG
60
10
GT
AW
CV
-W
IRE
CV
-FL
UX
CO
RE
D
7
ING
RN
WA
AM
A
2
Return to Section TOC
Center Panel
Base Assembly
Case Back
Case Front
Case Wraparound
FIGURE D.1 – MAJOR COMPONENT LOCATIONS
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
!
D-3
MAINTENANCE
D-3
5
!
ON
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
D-4
NOTES
V350-PRO
D-4
Return to Master TOC
Section E-1
Section E-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
-THEORY OF OPERATION SECTIONTheory of Operation .............................................................................................................Section E
General Description ....................................................................................................................E-2
Input Line Voltage, Auxiliary Transformer and Precharge...........................................................E-2
Switch Board and Main Transformer ..........................................................................................E-3
Power board, Control Board, and SPI Communications............................................................E-4
Output Rectifier and Choke ........................................................................................................E-5
Thermal Protection .....................................................................................................................E-6
Protection Circuits ......................................................................................................................E-6
Return to Master TOC
Over current Protection ........................................................................................................E-6
Under/Over Voltage Protection ............................................................................................E-6
Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) Operation ...................................................................E-7
Pulse Width Modulation..............................................................................................................E-8
Minimum/Maximum Output..................................................................................................E-8
FIGURE E.1 – V350-PRO BLOCK LOGIC DIAGRAM
To Control
Board
Main Switch Board
Current
Feedback
Positive
Output
Terminal
Primary
Current
Sensor
Choke
Primary
Current
Sensor
Fan
Fan Control
115VAC Fan Supply
Auxiliary
115VAC, 42VAC Transformer
24VAC
Primary Current Feedback
Input Relay Control
Soft Start Control
V/F Capacitor Feedback (2)
Negative
Output
Terminal
Output Voltage Sense
Reconnect
Switch
IGBT Drive Signal
Return to Master TOC
Input switch
Input
Rectifier
Machine Control Supply
+15VDC, -15VDC, +5VDC
Power
Board
28VAC
14 Pin
Amphenol
40VDC
SPI Supply +15VDC +5VDC
Control Board
RS232 Supply +5VDC
RS232
Remote Control & Trigger
Mode
Panel
Remote
Board
(Not used if APP
is in place)
12 VDC
Return to Master TOC
SPI Communications
6 Pin
Amphenol
Output
Control
Weld
Terminals
Optional Solenoid
Output
Potentiometer
V350-PRO
& +15VDC, +5VDC Supply
Display
Panel
Advanced
Process
Panel
THEORY OF OPERATION
FIGURE E.2 – INPUT VOLTAGE AND PRECHARGE
To Control
Board
Main Switch Board
Input switch
Input
Rectifier
Positive
Output
Terminal
Primary
Current
Sensor
Choke
Reconnect
Switch
Primary
Current
Sensor
Fan
Return to Master TOC
Fan Control
Soft Start Control
V/F Capacitor Feedback (2)
Machine Control Supply
+15VDC, -15VDC, +5VDC
Power
Board
28VAC
40VDC
SPI Supply +15VDC +5VDC
Control Board
RS232 Supply +5VDC
14 Pin
Amphenol
RS232
SPI Communications
Remote Control & Trigger
Mode
Panel
Remote
Board
(Not used if APP
is in place)
& +15VDC, +5VDC Supply
Display
Panel
Advanced
Process
Panel
12 VDC
Return to Section TOC
Auxiliary
115VAC, 42VAC Transformer
24VAC
Primary Current Feedback
Input Relay Control
IGBT Drive Signal
115VAC Fan Supply
Negative
Output
Terminal
Output Voltage Sense
Return to Master TOC
E-2
Current
Feedback
Return to Section TOC
E-2
6 Pin
Amphenol
Output
Control
Weld
Terminals
Optional Solenoid
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Output
Potentiometer
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
is rectified and the resultant 40VDC is applied to the
power board.
The Invertec V350-Pro is an inverter based welding
power source that offers multi mode constant voltage
(CV) and constant current (CC) welding and is rated at
350 amps 34VDC at a 60% duty cycle. The Invertec
V350-Pro is available in a construction version (no wire
feeder connection or auxiliary power ), a factory version that includes a wire feeder connection and related power, an advanced process version and a rack
version.
The input voltage is rectified by the input rectifier and
the resultant DC voltage is applied to the switch board
through the reconnect switch assembly located at the
rear of the machine. The reconnect switch connect the
two pairs of input capacitors either in a parallel (lower
voltage) or series (higher voltage) configuration to
accommodate the applied input voltage.
During the precharge time the DC input voltage is
to the input capacitors through a current limitINPUT LINE VOLTAGE, AUXILIARY applied
ing circuit. The input capacitors are charged slowly
TRANSFORMER, & PRECHARGE
and current limited. A voltage to frequency converter
circuit located on the switch board monitors the
The Invertec V350-Pro can be connected for a variety
capacitor voltages. This signal is coupled to the conof three-phase or single-phase input voltages. The initrol board (measure frequency, not voltage to check
tial power is applied to the V350 through a line switch
signal). When the input capacitors have charged to an
located on the front of the machine. Two phases of the
acceptable level, the control board energizes the input
input voltage are applied to the auxiliary transformer.
relays, that are located on the switch board, making all
The auxiliary transformer develops four different secof the input power, without current limiting, available
ondary voltages. The 115VAC is used to power the fan
to the input capacitors. If the capacitors become
motor and also is applied to the 14 pin amphenol type
under or over voltage the control board will de-enerconnector for wirefeeder operation. The 24VAC and
gize the input relays and the V350 output will be dis42VAC voltages are also applied to the 14 pin ampheabled. Other possible faults may also cause the input
nol type connector to power wirefeeders. The 28VAC
relays to drop out.
NOTE: Unshaded areas of Block Logic Diagram are the subject of discussion.
V350-PRO
THEORY OF OPERATION
FIGURE E.3 – SWITCH BOARD & MAIN TRANSFORMER
To Control
Board
Main Switch Board
Input switch
Input
Rectifier
Positive
Output
Terminal
Primary
Current
Sensor
Choke
Primary
Current
Sensor
Fan
Fan Control
Soft Start Control
V/F Capacitor Feedback (2)
Machine Control Supply
+15VDC, -15VDC, +5VDC
Power
Board
28VAC
40VDC
14 Pin
Amphenol
SPI Supply +15VDC +5VDC
Control Board
RS232 Supply +5VDC
RS232
SPI Communications
Remote Control & Trigger
Remote
Board
Mode
Panel
(Not used if APP
is in place)
& +15VDC, +5VDC Supply
Display
Panel
Advanced
Process
Panel
12 VDC
Return to Master TOC
Auxiliary
115VAC, 42VAC Transformer
24VAC
Primary Current Feedback
Input Relay Control
IGBT Drive Signal
115VAC Fan Supply
Return to Section TOC
Negative
Output
Terminal
Reconnect
Switch
Output Voltage Sense
Return to Master TOC
E-3
Current
Feedback
Return to Section TOC
E-3
6 Pin
Amphenol
Output
Control
Weld
Terminals
Optional Solenoid
Output
Potentiometer
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
SWITCH BOARD &
MAIN TRANSFORMER
There is one switch board in the Invertec V350-Pro.
This board incorporates two pairs of input capacitors,
two insulated gate bipolar transistor (IGBT) switching
circuits, a fan motor drive circuit, and a voltage/frequency capacitor feedback circuit. The two capacitors in a pair are always in series with each other.
When the reconnect switch is in the lower voltage
position the capacitor pairs are in parallel . Thus two
series capacitors in parallel with two series capacitors.
When the reconnect switch is in the high voltage position the two capacitor pairs are in series. Thus four
capacitors in series. This is required to accommodate
the higher input voltages.
When the input capacitors are fully charged they act
as power supplies for the IGBT switching circuits.
When welding output is required the Insulated Gate
Bipolar Transistors switch the DC power from the input
capacitors, "on and off" thus supplying a pulsed DC
current to the main transformer primary windings. See
IGBT Operation Discussion and Diagrams in this
section. Each IGBT switching circuit feeds current to
a separate, oppositely wound primary winding in the
main transformer. The reverse directions of current
flow through the main transformer primaries and the
offset timing of the IGBT switching circuits induce an
AC square wave output signal at the secondary of the
main transformer. The two current transformers (CT)
located on the switch board monitor these primary
currents. If the primary currents become abnormally
high the control board will shut off the IGBTs, thus disabling the machine output. The DC current flow
through each primary winding is clamped back to
each respective input capacitor when the IGBTs are
turned off. This is needed due to the inductance of the
transformer primary winding. The firing of the two
switch boards occurs during halves of a 50 microsecond interval, creating a constant 20 KHZ output. In
some low open circuit Tig modes the firing frequency
is reduced to 5KHZ.
The Invertec V350-Pro has a F.A.N. fan as needed circuit. The fan operates when the welding output terminals are energized or when a thermal over temperature condition exists. Once the fan is activated it will
remain on for a minimum of five minutes. The fan driver circuit is housed on the switch board but it is activated from a control board signal.
NOTE: Unshaded areas of Block Logic Diagram are the subject of discussion.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
E-4
THEORY OF OPERATION
FIGURE E.4 – POWER BOARD, CONTROL BOARD
AND SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI) COMMUNICATIONS
To Control
Board
Main Switch Board
Current
Feedback
Return to Section TOC
E-4
Input switch
Input
Rectifier
Positive
Output
Terminal
Primary
Current
Sensor
Choke
Primary
Current
Sensor
Fan
Fan Control
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Auxiliary
115VAC, 42VAC Transformer
24VAC
Primary Current Feedback
Input Relay Control
Soft Start Control
V/F Capacitor Feedback (2)
IGBT Drive Signal
115VAC Fan Supply
Negative
Output
Terminal
Output Voltage Sense
Reconnect
Switch
Machine Control Supply
+15VDC, -15VDC, +5VDC
Power
Board
28VAC
40VDC
14 Pin
Amphenol
SPI Supply +15VDC +5VDC
Control Board
RS232 Supply +5VDC
RS232
SPI Communications
Remote Control & Trigger
Remote
Board
Mode
Panel
(Not used if APP
is in place)
& +15VDC, +5VDC Supply
Display
Panel
Advanced
Process
Panel
12 VDC
6 Pin
Amphenol
Output
Control
Weld
Terminals
Optional Solenoid
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Output
Potentiometer
POWER BOARD, CONTROL BOARD
AND SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI) COMMUNICATIONS
POWER BOARD
The 28VAC auxiliary is rectified and filtered and applied
to the power board. The power board, utilizing a
switching power supply, processes the 40VDC input
and develops several regulated positive and negative
DC supplies. Three DC supplies are fed to the control
board for machine control supplies. Two positive DC
voltages are coupled to the control board for the Serial
Peripheral Communications (SPI) supplies. A +5VDC
is used for the RS232 connection supply. An over or
under input voltage detection and shutdown circuit is
also part of the power board’s circuitry. The optional
12VDC gas solenoid is powered by the remote board.
CONTROL BOARD
the V350 machine. The control board sends and
receives command signals from the mode or advanced
process panel, the display panel and the remote panel.
These communications are processed through a digital network called a Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI).
This network digitally communicates to and from the
control board the user’s commands and various
machine status messages. The software that is contained within the control board processes and compares these commands with the voltage and current
feedback information it receives from the output current sensor and the output voltage sensing leads. The
appropriate pulse width modulation (PWM) signals
(See Pulse Width Modulation in this section) are sent
to the switch board IGBTs. In this manner, the digitally controlled high-speed welding waveform is created
and regulated.
The control board also monitors the thermostats, the
main transformer primary currents and the input
capacitor voltages.
The control board performs the primary interfacing
functions to establish and maintain output control of
NOTE: Unshaded areas of Block Logic Diagram are the subject of discussion.
V350-PRO
THEORY OF OPERATION
FIGURE E.5 – OUTPUT RECTIFIER AND CHOKE
To Control
Board
Main Switch Board
Input switch
Input
Rectifier
Positive
Output
Terminal
Primary
Current
Sensor
Choke
Reconnect
Switch
Primary
Current
Sensor
Fan
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Fan Control
Auxiliary
115VAC, 42VAC Transformer
24VAC
Primary Current Feedback
Input Relay Control
Soft Start Control
V/F Capacitor Feedback (2)
IGBT Drive Signal
115VAC Fan Supply
Machine Control Supply
+15VDC, -15VDC, +5VDC
Power
Board
28VAC
14 Pin
Amphenol
40VDC
SPI Supply +15VDC +5VDC
Control Board
RS232 Supply +5VDC
RS232
SPI Communications
Remote Control & Trigger
Remote
Board
Mode
Panel
(Not used if APP
is in place)
& +15VDC, +5VDC Supply
Display
Panel
Advanced
Process
Panel
12 VDC
6 Pin
Amphenol
Output
Control
Weld
Terminals
Optional Solenoid
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Output
Potentiometer
Return to Section TOC
Negative
Output
Terminal
Output Voltage Sense
Return to Master TOC
E-5
Current
Feedback
Return to Section TOC
E-5
OUTPUT RECTIFIER AND CHOKE
The output rectifier receives the AC output from the
main transformer secondary and rectifies it to a DC
voltage level. Since the output choke is in series with
the negative leg of the output rectifier and also in
series with the welding load, a filtered DC output is
applied to the machine’s output terminals.
NOTE: Unshaded areas of Block Logic Diagram are the subject of discussion.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
E-6
THEORY OF OPERATION
OVER CURRENT
PROTECTION
THERMAL PROTECTION
Two normally closed (NC) thermostats protect the
machine from excessive operating temperatures.
These thermostats are wired in series and are connected to the control board. One of the thermostats is
located on the heat sink of the switch board and the
other is located on the output choke. Excessive temperatures may be caused by a lack of cooling air or
operating the machine beyond its duty cycle or output
rating. If excessive operating temperatures should
occur, the thermostats will prevent output from the
machine. The yellow thermal light, located on the front
of the machine, will be illuminated. The thermostats
are self-resetting once the machine cools sufficiently.
If the thermostat shutdown was caused by excessive
output or duty cycle and the fan is operating normally,
the power switch may be left on and the reset should
occur within a 15-minute period.
If the average current exceeds 450 amps for one second, then the output will be limited to 100 amps until
the load is removed. If the peak current exceeds 600
amps for 150 ms, the output will be limited to 100
amps until the load is removed.
UNDER/OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION
Protective circuits are included on the switch and control boards to monitor the voltage across the input
capacitors. In the event that a capacitor pair voltage
is too high, or too low, the machine output will be disabled. The protection circuits will prevent output if any
of the following conditions exist.
1. Voltage across a capacitor pair exceeds 467
volts. (High line surges or improper input voltage
connections.)
PROTECTIVE CIRCUITS
Protective circuits are designed into the V350-PRO to
sense trouble and shut down the machine before
damage occurs to the machine's internal components.
2. Voltage across a capacitor pair is under 190 volts.
(Due to improper input voltage connections.)
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
3. Internal component damage.
Return to Section TOC
E-6
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
E-7
E-7
THEORY OF OPERATION
INSULATED GATE BIPOLAR
TRANSISTOR (IGBT)
OPERATION
An IGBT is a type of transistor. IGBT are semiconductors well suited for high frequency switching and high
current applications.
capable of conducting current. A voltage supply connected to the drain terminal will allow the IGBT to conduct and supply current to the circuit components
coupled to the source. Current will flow through the
conducting IGBT to downstream components as long
as the positive gate signal is present. This is similar to
turning ON a light switch.
Example A in Figure E.6 shows an IGBT in passive
mode. There is no gate signal, zero volts relative to the
source, and therefore, no current flow. The drain terminal of the IGBT may be connected to a voltage supply; but since there is no conduction, the circuit will not
supply current to components connected to the
source. The circuit is turned OFF like a light switch.
Example B shows the IGBT in an active mode. When
the gate signal , a positive DC voltage relative to the
source, is applied to the gate terminal of the IGBT, it is
FIGURE E.6 – IGBT
POSITIVE
VOLTAGE
APPLIED
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
SOURCE
n+
GATE
SOURCE
n+
n+
GATE
n+
p
BODY REGION
p
BODY REGION
n-
DRAIN DRIFT REGION
n-
DRAIN DRIFT REGION
n+
BUFFER LAYER
n+
BUFFER LAYER
p+
INJECTING LAYER
p+
INJECTING LAYER
DRAIN
DRAIN
B. ACTIVE
A. PASSIVE
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
E-8
E-8
THEORY OF OPERATION
FIGURE E.7 — TYPICAL IGBT OUTPUTS.
sec
48
50
sec
sec
sec
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
MINIMUM OUTPUT
24 sec
24 sec
2 sec
50 sec
MAXIMUM OUTPUT
MAXIMUM OUTPUT
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
PULSE WIDTH
MODULATION
The term Pulse Width Modulation is used to describe
how much time is devoted to conduction in the positive and negative portions of the cycle. Changing the
pulse width is known as modulation. Pulse Width
Modulation (PWM) is the varying of the pulse width
over the allowed range of a cycle to affect the output
of the machine.
MINIMUM OUTPUT
By holding the gate signal on for 24 microseconds
each, and allowing only two microseconds of dwell
time (off time) during the 50-microsecond cycle, the
output is maximized. The darkened area under the top
curve can be compared to the area under the bottom
curve. The more dark area that is under the curve indicates that more power is present.
1An IGBT group
modules feeding
winding.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
By controlling the duration of the gate signal, the IGBT
is turned on and off for different durations during the
cycle. The top drawing in Figure E.7 shows the minimum output signal possible over a 50-microsecond
time period.
The positive portion of the signal represents one IGBT
group1 conducting for one microsecond. The negative
portion is the other IGBT group1. The dwell time (off
time) is 48 microseconds (both IGBT groups off). Since
only two microseconds of the 50-microsecond time
period is devoted to conducting, the output power is
minimized.
V350-PRO
consists of two IGBT
one transformer primary
Section F-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR SECTION
Troubleshooting & Repair Section .................................................................................Section F
How to Use Troubleshooting Guide ....................................................................................F-2
PC Board Troubleshooting Procedures and Replacement .................................................F-3
Troubleshooting Guide ........................................................................................................F-4
Test Procedures
Input Filter Capacitor Discharge Procedure .................................................................F-15
Main Switch Board Test ................................................................................................F-17
Input Rectifier Test ........................................................................................................F-21
Power Board Test..........................................................................................................F-25
Output Diode Modules Test ..........................................................................................F-29
Auxiliary Transformer Test .............................................................................................F-33
Current Transducer Test ................................................................................................F-37
Fan Control and Motor Test ..........................................................................................F-41
SPI Cable Resistance and Voltage Test........................................................................F-45
Voltage and Current Calibration Procedure ..................................................................F-47
Replacement Procedures
Control Board Removal and Replacement ...................................................................F-51
Display Board Removal and Replacement ...................................................................F-55
Main Switch Board Removal and Replacement ...........................................................F-59
Advanced Process Panel Removal and Replacement .................................................F-63
Remote Board Removal and Replacement ..................................................................F-69
Snubber Board Removal and Replacement .................................................................F-73
Power Board Removal and Replacement.....................................................................F-75
Input Rectifier Removal and Replacement ...................................................................F-79
Output Rectifier Modules Removal and Replacement .................................................F-83
Current Transducer Removal and Replacement ...........................................................F-87
Retest after Repair ........................................................................................................F-92
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Section F-1
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-2
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
HOW TO USE TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
CAUTION
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric Factory Trained Personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician and machine
operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid Electrical Shock, please
observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this manual.
This Troubleshooting Guide is provided to help
you locate and repair possible machine
malfunctions. Simply follow the three-step
procedure listed below.
Step 1. LOCATE PROBLEM (SYMPTOM). Look
under the column labeled “PROBLEM
(SYMPTOMS)”. This column describes possible
symptoms that the machine may exhibit. Find
the listing that best describes the symptom that
the machine is exhibiting. Symptoms are
grouped into three main categories: Output
Problems, Function Problems, and LED Function
Problems.
Step 2. PERFORM EXTERNAL TESTS. The
second column, labeled “POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENT(S)”, lists the obvious external
possibilities that may contribute to the machine
symptom. Perform these tests/checks in the
order listed. In general, these tests can be
conducted without removing the case
wrap-around cover.
Step 3. PERFORM COMPONENT TESTS. The
last column, labeled “Recommended Course of
Action” lists the most likely components that may
have failed in your machine. It also specifies the
appropriate test procedure to verify that the
subject component is either good or bad. If there
are a number of possible components, check the
components in the order listed to eliminate one
possibility at a time until you locate the cause of
your problem.
All of the referenced test procedures referred to in
the Troubleshooting Guide are described in detail
at the end of this chapter. Refer to the
Troubleshooting and Repair Table of Contents to
locate each specific Test Procedure. All of the
referred to test points, components, terminal
strips, etc., can be found on the referenced
electrical wiring diagrams and schematics. Refer
to the Electrical Diagrams Section Table of
Contents to locate the appropriate diagram.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the test/repairs
safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical troubleshooting assistance before
you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353.(WELD)
V350-PRO
F-2
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
WARNING
ELECTRIC SHOCK
can kill.
• Have an electrician install and
service this equipment. Turn the
input power OFF at the fuse box
before working on equipment. Do
not touch electrically hot parts.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
CAUTION
Sometimes machine failures appear to be due to PC
board failures. These problems can sometimes be
traced to poor electrical connections. To avoid problems when troubleshooting and replacing PC boards,
please use the following procedure:
1. Determine to the best of your technical ability
that the PC board is the most likely component
causing the failure symptom.
2. Check for loose connections at the PC board to
assure that the PC board is properly connected.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
3. If the problem persists, replace the suspect PC
board using standard practices to avoid static
electrical damage and electrical shock. Read
the warning inside the static resistant bag and
perform the following procedures:
Return to Section TOC
F-3
PC BOARD TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-3
- Remove the PC board from the static-shielding bag
and place it directly into the equipment. Don’t set the
PC board on or near paper, plastic or cloth which
could have a static charge. If the PC board can’t be
installed immediately, put it back in the static-shielding bag.
- If the PC board uses protective shorting jumpers,
don’t remove them until installation is complete.
- If you return a PC board to The Lincoln Electric
Company for credit, it must be in the static-shielding
bag. This will prevent further damage and allow proper failure analysis.
4. Test the machine to determine if the failure
symptom has been corrected by the
replacement PC board.
NOTE: It is desirable to have a spare (known good)
PC board available for PC board troubleshooting.
NOTE: Allow the machine to heat up so that all
electrical components can reach their operating
temperature.
5. Remove the replacement PC board and
substitute it with the original PC board to
recreate the original problem.
a. If the original problem does not reappear by
substituting the original board, then the PC
board was not the problem. Continue to look
for bad connections in the control wiring
harness, junction blocks, and terminal strips.
PC board can be damaged by static electricity.
ATTENTION
Static-Sensitive
Devices
Handle only at
Static-Safe
Workstations
- Remove your body’s static
charge before opening the staticshielding bag. Wear an anti-static
wrist strap. For safety, use a 1
Meg ohm resistive cord connected
to a grounded part of the
equipment frame.
- If you don’t have a wrist strap,
touch an un-painted, grounded,
part of the equipment frame. Keep
touching the frame to prevent
static build-up. Be sure not to
touch any electrically live parts at
the same time.
b. If the original problem is recreated by the
substitution of the original board, then the PC
board was the problem. Reinstall the
replacement PC board and test the machine.
6. Always indicate that this procedure was
followed when warranty reports are to be
submitted.
NOTE: Following this procedure and writing on the
warranty report, “INSTALLED AND SWITCHED PC
BOARDS TO VERIFY PROBLEM,” will help avoid
denial of legitimate PC board warranty claims.
- Tools which come in contact with the PC board must
be either conductive, anti-static or static-dissipative.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Observe Safety Guidelines
detailed in the beginning of this manual.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)
POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENT(S)
OUTPUT PROBLEMS
RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION
Major physical or electrical damage
is evident when the sheet metal
cover is removed.
1. Contact your local authorized
Lincoln Electric Field Service
Facility for technical assistance.
1. Contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department,
The machine is dead—no output—
no displays.
1. Make sure the input line/breaker
switch is in the ON position.
1. Perform
the
Transformer Test.
2. Check the 3.5 amp circuit breaker (CB3). Reset if tripped.
2. Perform the Power Board Test.
3. Check the main input line fuses.
If open , replace.
3. The control rectifier and or associated filter capacitor (C5) may
be faulty. Check and replace as
necessary.
4. Check the 3.5 amp circuit breaker (CB2). Reset if tripped.
5. Check the 6 amp circuit breaker
(CB1). Reset if tripped.
6. Make sure the reconnect switch
and jumper lead is configured
correctly for the applied input
voltage.
Return to Master TOC
1-800-833-9353(WELD).
Auxiliary
4. Perform
The
SPI
Cable
Resistance and Voltage Test.
5. The Control Board may be faulty.
7. If the machine is being operated
with single phase input voltage
make sure the red lead is not
connected. See the Installation
Section.
The main input fuses (or breaker)
repeatedly fail.
1. Make certain the fuses or breakers are sized properly.
2. Make sure the reconnect switch
and jumper lead is configured
correctly for the applied input
voltage.
3. The welding procedure may be
drawing too much input current
or the duty cycle may be too
high. Reduce the welding current and /or reduce the duty
cycle.
Return to Section TOC
F-4
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-4
1. Check the reconnect switches
and associated wiring. See the
Wiring Diagram.
2. Perform the Input Rectifier
Test.
3. Perform the Main Switch Board
Test.
4. Perform the
Module Test.
Output
Diode
5. The Input Filter Capacitors may
be faulty. Check, and if any are
faulty replace all four.
CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call
1-800-833-9353(WELD).
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)
The V350-Pro does not have welding output. The displays are lit.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Observe Safety Guidelines
detailed in the beginning of this manual.
POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENT(S)
1. Make sure the reconnect switch
is configured correctly for the
input voltage applied.
2. Make sure the Weld Terminals
Select is ON. If the problem is
solved the remote control
device or associated circuitry
may be faulty. See the wiring
diagram.
3. Put the Control Select in the
Local position. If the problem is
solved the remote control
device or associated circuitry
may be faulty.
4. If an error code is displayed see
Fault Code Explanations.
The V350-Pro will not produce full
output.
1. The input voltage may be too
low, limiting the output capability of the machine. Make certain the input voltage is correct
for the machine and the reconnect switch and jumper lead
configuration.
2. The welding current may be too
high . The machine will fold
back to 100 amps if the welding current exceeds 450 amps.
Return to Master TOC
3. Make sure the machine is in
"Local" output control.. If the
problem is resolved the Remote
control board or the external
remote control unit may be
faulty.
Return to Section TOC
F-5
RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION
OUTPUT PROBLEMS
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-5
1. Check the reconnect switch and
associated leads for loose or
faulty connections. See the
wiring diagram.
2. Perform the Main Switch
Board Test.
3. Perform the Power Board
Test.
4. Perform the Output Diode
Module Test.
5. The control board may be faulty.
6. The input filter capacitors may
be faulty. Check and replace if
necessary.
7. The remote board may be
faulty.
1. Perform the Output Rectifier
Test.
2. Perform the Main Switch
Board Test.
3. Perform the Power Board
Test.
4. Perform the Current
Transducer Test.
5. If the preset function is not
performing properly the status
panel board or the output
control may be faulty.
6. The control board may be
faulty.
CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.
Call 1-800-833-9353(WELD).
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-6
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Observe Safety Guidelines
detailed in the beginning of this manual.
PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)
POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENT(S)
The machine regularly overheats
and the yellow thermal light is ON
indicating a thermal overload.
1. Check the 3.5 amp circuit
breaker (CB2). Reset if tripped.
3. Dirt and dust may have clogged
the cooling channels inside the
machine.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION
FUNCTION PROBLEMS
2. The welding application may
be exceeding the
recommended duty cycle of the
V350-Pro.
Return to Section TOC
F-6
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
4. Air intake and exhaust louvers
may be blocked due to inadequate clearance around the
machine.
5. Make certain the fan as needed
(F.A.N.) is operating properly.
The fan should operate when
welding voltage is present
and/or when there is an over
temperature condition.
An attached wire feeder
function correctly.
will not
1. Make certain the wire feeder
control cable is connected to
the correct 14-pin amphenol
type
plug
(115VAC
or
24/42VAC) for the wire feeder
being used. See the connection
diagram. If wirefeeder has DIP
switch, be sure it is set correctly.
1. The 115VAC fan motor is controlled by the control board via
the main switch board. Perform
the Fan Motor And Control
Test.
1. A thermostat or associated circuitry may be faulty. See the
wiring diagram. One normally
closed thermostat is located on
the output choke and the other
is located on the main switch
board heat sink. See the wiring
diagram.
Note: The Main Switch Board
Removal Procedure will be
required to gain access to
the heat sink thermostat.
1. Perform
the
Transformer Test.
Auxiliary
2. Check the leads between the
14-pin amphenol type plugs and
the auxiliary transformer for
loose or faulty connections.
2. Check the two circuit breakers
located at the rear of the
machine. Reset if tripped.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
3. The wire feeder or control cable
may be faulty.
CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call
1-800-833-9353(WELD).
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
F-7
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
Observe Safety Guidelines
detailed in the beginning of this manual.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)
RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION
POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENT(S)
FUNCTION PROBLEMS
The machine’s welding output is
very high and uncontrollable.
1. Put the Control Select in the
Local position. If the problem is
solved the remote control
device or associated circuitry
may be faulty.
2. Check for proper current and
voltage calibration.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-7
1. Perform
the
Transducer Test.
Current
2. If the output is normal when
the Control Select is in the Local
position but the output is very
high in the Remote position the
remote board may be faulty.
Perform The SPI Cable
Resistance and Voltage Test.
3. The control board may be faulty.
The Weld Mode Select does not
function properly.
1. Refer to Operation Section of
this manual for normal operation
characteristics.
NOTE: The mode panel is not present if the advanced
process panel is installed.
1. Check for loose or faulty plug
connections between the control board and the mode select
panel. See the wiring diagram.
2. Perform
the
SPI
Cable
Resistance and Voltage Test.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
3. The Mode Select Panel board
may be faulty.
4. The control board may be faulty.
The output control and/or Weld
Terminals Select functions do not
operate properly.
1. Refer to Operation Section of
this manual for normal operation
characteristics.
2. Check for proper current and
voltage calibration.
1. Check for loose or faulty plug
connections
between
the
remote board and the weld/output controls. See the wiring diagram.
2. The Remote Board may be
faulty.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
3. The control board may be faulty.
CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.
Call 1-800-833-9353(WELD).
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-8
Observe Safety Guidelines
detailed in the beginning of this manual.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)
RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION
POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENT(S)
FUNCTION PROBLEMS
The display is not functioning properly.
1. Refer to the Operation Section
of this manual for normal operation characteristics.
2. Check for proper current and
voltage calibration.
1. Check for loose or faulty plug
connections
between
the
Display board and the control
board. See the wiring diagram.
2. The display board may be faulty.
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
3. The control board may be faulty.
A fault or error code is displayed.
1. See
the
Fault
Explanations.
Code
For no apparent reason the welding
characteristics have change.
1. Check the welding cables for
loose or faulty connection.
2. Make sure the machine’s mode
and output are set correctly for
the process being used. (CV,
CC,TIG etc.)
Return to Master TOC
3. If Mig welding make sure the
shielding gas and wire speed are
correct for the process being
used.
4. Check for proper current and
voltage calibration.
Return to Section TOC
F-8
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
1. See Fault Code Explanations.
1. Perform the
Current
Procedure.
Voltage and
Calibration
2. Perform
the
Transducer Test.
Current
3. Perform the Output Diode
Module Test
4. The control board may be faulty.
5. The advanced process panel (If
used) may be faulty.
CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.
Call 1-800-833-9353(WELD).
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-9
F-9
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
FAULT CODES
31
DESCRIPTION/
CORRECTIVE
DEFINITION
ACTION
Main transformer
primary over current
Turn the machine off and
back on to reset the
machine. If condition
persists, contact an
authorized Lincoln Field
Service Facility.
SERVICE FACILITY
CORRECTIVE
ACTION
Perform the Main Switch
Board Test.
Perform the Power
Board Test.
The control board may
be faulty.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
There may be a problem
with the primary current
sensors (CT) located on
the main switch board.
See the Wiring diagram
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
32
Capacitor bank “A”
(lower) is under
voltage
Make sure the reconnect
switches are configured
for the input voltage
being applied to the
machine. The machine
is self clearing when
condition ceases.
There may be a problem
with the V/F signals from
the main switch board to
the control board.
Perform the Main Switch
Board Test.
Perform the Power
Board Test.
The control board may
be faulty.
NOTE: If more than one fault message is being displayed, perform all the checks for the faults
before replacing the printed circuit board
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-10
F-10
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
FAULT CODES
33
DESCRIPTION/
CORRECTIVE
DEFINITION
ACTION
Capacitor bank
"B"(upper) is under
voltage.
Make sure the reconnect
switches are configured
for the input voltage
being applied to the
machine. The machine
is self-clearing when
condition ceases.
SERVICE FACILITY
CORRECTIVE
ACTION
There may be a problem
with the V/F signals from
the main switch board to
the control board.
Perform the Main Switch
Board Test.
The control board may
be faulty.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Perform the Power
Board Test.
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
34
Capacitor bank
"A"(lower) is over
voltage.
Make sure the reconnect
switches are configured
for the input voltage
being applied to the
machine. The machine
is self-clearing when
condition ceases.
There may be a problem
with the V/F signals from
the main switch board to
the control board.
Perform the Main Switch
Board Test.
Perform the Power
Board Test.
The control board may
be faulty.
NOTE: If more than one fault message is being displayed, perform all the checks for the faults
before replacing the printed circuit board
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-11
F-11
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
FAULT CODES
35
DESCRIPTION/
CORRECTIVE
DEFINITION
ACTION
Capacitor bank
"B"(lower) is over
voltage.
Make sure the reconnect
switches are configured
for the input voltage
being applied to the
machine. The machine
is self-clearing when
condition ceases.
SERVICE FACILITY
CORRECTIVE
ACTION
There may be a problem
with the V/F signals from
the main switch board to
the control board.
Perform the Main Switch
Board Test.
The control board may
be faulty.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Perform the Power
Board Test.
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
37
The soft start
function failed.
Turn the machine off and
back on to reset the
machine.
There may be a problem
with the V/F signals from
the main switch board to
the control board.
Perform the Main Switch
Board Test.
Perform the Power
Board Test.
The control board may
be faulty.
NOTE: If more than one fault message is being displayed, perform all the checks for the faults
before replacing the printed circuit board
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-12
F-12
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
FAULT CODES
39
DESCRIPTION/
CORRECTIVE
DEFINITION
ACTION
Electrical "glitch" on the
primary over current fault
detector circuit.
Possibly caused by an
external electrical
"noise" or signal level.
Make sure the V350-Pro
is grounded correctly.
The machine is self
clearing when
condition ceases.
SERVICE FACILITY
CORRECTIVE
ACTION
Perform the Main Switch
Board Test.
Perform the Power
Board Test.
There may be a problem
with the primary current
sensors (CT) located on
the main switch board.
See the wiring diagram.
The control board may
be faulty.
43
Capacitor banks "A"
(lower) and "B"(upper)
are not balanced.
Make sure the reconnect switches are configured for the input
voltage being applied to
the machine. The
machine is self-clearing
when
condition ceases.
There may be a problem
with the V/F signals from
the main switch board to
the control board.
Perform the Main Switch
Board Test.
The capacitor(s) may be
faulty. Check and
replace if necessary.
44
The machine has
detected a fault in the
central processing unit
(CPU).
Make sure the V350-Pro
is grounded correctly.
The machine is self
clearing when
condition ceases.
Perform the Power
Board Test.
The control board or
associated wiring may be
faulty. See the wiring
diagram.
NOTE: If more than one fault message is being displayed, perform all the checks for the faults
before replacing the printed circuit board
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-13
F-13
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
FAULT CODES
47
DESCRIPTION/
CORRECTIVE
DEFINITION
ACTION
Electrical "glitch" on the
V/F signals from the main
switch board to the
control board.
Possibly caused by an
external electrical
"noise" or signal level.
Make sure the V350-Pro
is grounded correctly.
The machine is self
clearing when condition
ceases.
SERVICE FACILITY
CORRECTIVE
ACTION
There may be a problem
with the V/F signals from
the main switch board to
the control board.
Perform the Main Switch
Board Test.
The control board may
be faulty.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Perform the Power
Board Test.
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
“bad node” “####”
The selected weld mode Press the Mode Select
does not exist in the weld button to select a
table that is presently
different welding mode.
loaded in the machine.
If new software was just
installed, try reinstalling
the software or put the
original software back.
Perform the Power
Board Test.
Perform the SPI Cable
Resistance and Voltage
Test.
The control board may
be faulty.
NOTE: If more than one fault message is being displayed, perform all the checks for the faults
before replacing the printed circuit board
V350-PRO
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-14
NOTES
V350-PRO
F-14
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-15
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
INPUT FILTER CAPACITOR DISCHARGE PROCEDURE
WARNING
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained
personnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to
the technician or machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your
safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions
detailed throughout this manual.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).
DESCRIPTION
This procedure will drain off any charge stored in the four large capacitors that are part
of the switch board assembly. This procedure MUST be performed, as a safety precaution, before conducting any test or repair procedure that requires you to touch internal components of the machine.
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
MATERIALS NEEDED
5/16” Nut Driver
Insulated Pliers
Insulated Gloves
High Wattage Resistor (25-1000 ohms and 25 watts minimum)
DC Volt Meter
This procedure takes approximately 20 minutes to perform.
V350-PRO
F-15
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-16
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
INPUT FILTER CAPACITOR DISCHARGE PROCEDURE (continued)
4. Obtain a high resistance and high wattage resistor
(25-1000 ohms and 25 watts minimum). This
resistor is not with the machine. NEVER USE A
SHORTING STRAP FOR THIS PROCEDURE.
WARNING
ELECTRIC SHOCK can kill.
• Have an electrician install and service
this equipment.
• Turn the input power off at the fuse box
before working on equipment.
Return to Master TOC
• Do not touch electrically hot parts.
Return to Section TOC
F-16
• Prior to performing preventative maintenance,
perform the following capacitor discharge procedure
to avoid electric shock.
5. Locate the eight capacitor terminals shown in figure F.1.
6. Using electrically insulated gloves and pliers, hold
the body of the resistor with the pliers and connect the resistor leads across the two capacitor
terminals. Hold the resistor in place for 10 seconds. DO NOT TOUCH CAPACITOR TERMINALS
WITH YOUR BARE HANDS.
7. Repeat the discharge procedure for the other
three capacitors.
DISCHARGE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the input power to the V350-PRO.
2. Using the 5/16” wrench remove the screws from
the case wraparound cover.
3. Be careful not to make contact with the capacitor
terminals located at the top and bottom of the
switch board.
8. Check the voltage across the terminals of all
capacitors with a DC voltmeter. Polarity of the
capacitor terminals is marked on the PC board
above the terminals. Voltage should be zero. If
any voltage remains, repeat this capacitor discharge procedure.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
FIGURE F.1 – LOCATION OF INPUT FILTER CAPACITOR TERMINALS
EIGHT
CAPACITOR
TERMINALS
-
+
-
+
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
INSULATED
PLIERS
-
+
+
INSULATED
GLOVES
POWER
RESISTOR
V350-PRO
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-17
MAIN SWITCH BOARD TEST
WARNING
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this
manual.
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).
DESCRIPTION
This test will help determine if the “power section” of the switch boards are functioning correctly. This test will NOT indicate if the entire PC board is functional. This resistance test is
preferable to a voltage test with the machine energized because this board can be damaged
easily. In addition, it is dangerous to work on this board with the machine energized.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
MATERIALS NEEDED
Analog Volt/Ohmmeter
5/16 in. Wrench
7/16 in. Wrench
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
This procedure takes approximately 30 minutes to perform.
V350-PRO
F-17
F-18
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-18
MAIN SWITCH BOARD TEST (continued)
FIGURE F.2 MAIN SWITCH BOARD LEAD LOCATIONS
202
207
J22
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
-
+
-
201
+
209
204
205
208
J21
J20
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
-
+
-
206
203
TEST PROCEDURE
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver, remove the case
wraparound.
Return to Master TOC
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor Discharge
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.
Return to Section TOC
+
4. Using a 7/16” wrench locate, label and remove
leads 201, 202, 203, 204, 205, 206, 207 and
208 from the switch board. Note lead and
washer placement for reassembly. Clear
leads.
5. Using the Analog ohmmeter, perform the resistance tests detailed in Table F.1. Refer to figure F.2 for test point locations. Note: Test
using an Analog ohmmeter on the Rx1 range.
Make sure the test probes are making electrical contact with the conductor surfaces on the
PC board.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-19
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
F-19
MAIN SWITCH BOARD TEST (continued)
6. If any test fails replace the switch board. See
Main Switch Board Removal and Replacement.
7. If the switch board resistance tests are OK, check
connections on plugs J20, J21, J22 and all associated wiring. See wiring diagram.
8. Reconnect leads 201, 202, 203, 204, 205, 206,
207, and 208 to the switch board. Ensure that the
leads are installed in their proper locations. PreTorque all leads nuts to 25 inch lbs. before tightening them to 44 inch lbs.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
9. Replace the case wraparound cover using a 5/16”
nut driver.
TABLE F.1. SWITCH BOARD RESISTANCE TEST
APPLY POSITIVE TEST
PROBE TO TERMINAL
APPLY NEGATIVE TEST
PROBE TO TERMINAL
NORMAL
RESISTANCE READING
+206
+208
+202
+201
+205
+203
+204
+207
-205
-203
-204
-207
-206
-208
-202
-201
Greater than 1000 ohms
Greater than 1000 ohms
Greater than 1000 ohms
Greater than 1000 ohms
Less than 100 ohms
Less than 100 ohms
Less than 100 ohms
Less than 100 ohms
V350-PRO
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-20
NOTES
V350-PRO
F-20
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-21
INPUT RECTIFIER TEST
WARNING
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this
manual.
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).
DESCRIPTION
This test will help determine if the input rectifier has “shorted” or “open” diodes.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
MATERIALS NEEDED
Analog Voltmeter/Ohmmeter (Multimeter)
5/16” Nut Driver
Phillips Head Screwdriver
Wiring Diagram
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
This procedure takes approximately 25 minutes to perform.
V350-PRO
F-21
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-22
F-22
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
INPUT RECTIFIER TEST (CONTINUED)
TEST PROCEDURE
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO
machine.
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver, remove the case
wraparound cover.
3. Perform the Capacitor Discharge
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.
4. Locate the input rectifier and associated
leads. See Figure F.3.
6. Using a phillips head screwdriver,
remove leads 207, 207A, and 209 from
the input rectifier.
7. Use the analog ohmmeter to perform the
tests detailed in Table F.2. See the
Wiring Diagram.
8. Visually inspect the three MOV’S for
damage (TP1,TP2,TP3). Replace if necessary.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
5. Carefully remove the silicone sealant
from leads 207, 207A, and 209.
Figure F.3 Input Rectifier
Small Lead "H1"
To Auxiliary Transformer
3/16" ALLEN
BOLTS
C
#207
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
B
#207A
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
A
#209
FRONT
REAR
V350-PRO
Small Lead "A"
To Circuit Breaker
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-23
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
INPUT RECTIFIER TEST (CONTINUED)
Table F.2 Input Rectifier Test Points
Return to Master TOC
ANALOG METER
X10 RANGE
TEST POINT TERMINALS
+ PROBE
- PROBE
Acceptable Meter Readings
A
B
C
207
207
207
Greater than 1000 ohms
Greater than 1000 ohms
Greater than 1000 ohms
A
B
C
207A
207A
207A
Greater than 1000 ohms
Greater than 1000 ohms
Greater than 1000 ohms
A
B
C
209
209
209
Less than 100 ohms
Less than 100 ohms
Less than 100 ohms
207
207
207
A
B
C
Less than 100 ohms
Less than 100 ohms
Less than 100 ohms
207A
207A
207A
A
B
C
Less than 100 ohms
Less than 100 ohms
Less than 100 ohms
209
209
209
A
B
C
Greater than 1000 ohms
Greater than 1000 ohms
Greater than 1000 ohms
9. If the input rectifier does not meet the
acceptable readings outlined in Table F.2
the component may be faulty. Replace
Return to Section TOC
F-23
Note: Before replacing the input rectifier,
check the input power switch and perform the Main Switch Board Test. Also
check for leaky or faulty filter capacitors.
11. If the input rectifier is faulty, see the
Input Rectifier Bridge Removal &
Replacement procedure.
12. Replace the case wraparound cover.
10. If the input rectifier is good, be sure to
reconnect leads 207, 207A, and 209 to
the correct terminals and torque to 31
inch lbs. Apply silicone sealant.
V350-PRO
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-24
NOTES
V350-PRO
F-24
F-25
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-25
POWER BOARD TEST
WARNING
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this
manual.
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).
DESCRIPTION
This test will help determine if the power board is receiving the correct voltages and also if
the power board is regulating and producing the correct DC voltages.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
MATERIALS NEEDED
Volt-Ohmmeter
5/16” Nut Driver
Wiring Diagram
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
This procedure takes approximately 30 minutes to perform.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-26
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
POWER BOARD TEST (CONTINUED)
TEST PROCEDURE
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO
machine.
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver, remove the case
wraparound cover.
3. Perform the Capacitor Discharge
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
4. Locate the power board and plugs J41, J42
and J43. Do not remove plugs from the
power board. See Figure F.4.
5. Carefully apply the correct input voltage to
the V350-PRO.
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
8. If any of the DC voltages are low, or not
present at plugs J42 or J43, the power
board may be faulty.
9. Remove the input power to the V350-PRO.
10. Replace the case wraparound cover using
a 5/16” nut driver.
6. Carefully test for the correct voltages at the
power board. See Table F.3.
Figure F.4 Power Board Plug Location
J42
Return to Section TOC
7. If the 40VDC is low, or not present at plug
J41, check the rectifier bridge and C5 filter
capacitor. See Wiring Diagram. Also perform the Auxiliary Transformer Test.
J41
V350-PRO
J43
F-26
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-27
Return to Master TOC
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
POWER BOARD TEST (CONTINUED)
Table F.3 Power Board Voltage Checks
CHECK POINT
LOCATION
TEST
DESCRIPTION
CONNECTOR
PLUG PIN NO.
POWER PC
BOARD
CONNECTOR
PLUG J41
CHECK 40VDC
SUPPLY FROM
RECT. BRIDGE
TO POWER BD.
2(+)
1(-)
POWER PC
BOARD
CONNECTOR
PLUG J42
CHECK +15VDC
SUPPLY FROM
POWER PC
BOARD
1(+)
5(-)
POWER PC
BOARD
CONNECTOR
PLUG J42
CHECK +5VDC
SUPPLY FROM
POWER PC
BOARD
3(+)
5(-)
POWER PC
BOARD
CONNECTOR
PLUG J42
CHECK -15VDC
SUPPLY FROM
POWER PC
BOARD
POWER PC
BOARD
CONNECTOR
PLUG J43
CHECK +5VDC
“SPI” SUPPLY
FROM POWER
PC BOARD
POWER PC
BOARD
CONNECTOR
PLUG J43
CHECK +5VDC
“RS232”
SUPPLY FROM
POWER PC
BOARD
LEAD NO.
OR IDENTITY
NORMAL
ACCEPTABLE
VOLTAGE
READING
65 (+)
66 (-)
38-42 VDC
412 (+)
410 (-)
15 VDC
410
408 (+)
410 (-)
5 VDC
410
411 (+)
410 (-)
-15 VDC
403 (+)
401 (-)
5 VDC
406 (+)
405 (-)
5 VDC
402 (+)
401 (-)
15 VDC
65
66
410
412
408
2(+)
5(-)
411
401
3(+)
12(-)
403
POWER PC
BOARD
CONNECTOR
PLUG J43
Return to Section TOC
F-27
CHECK +15VDC
“SPI” SUPPLY
FROM POWER
PC BOARD
4(+)
9(-)
405
406
401
6(+)
12(-)
402
V350-PRO
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-28
NOTES
V350-PRO
F-28
Return to Master TOC
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
OUTPUT DIODE MODULES TEST
WARNING
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this
manual.
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-29
DESCRIPTION
This test will help determine if any of the output diodes are “shorted”.
MATERIALS NEEDED
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Analog Voltmeter/Ohmmeter
Wiring Diagram
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
This procedure takes approximately 20 minutes to perform.
V350-PRO
F-29
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-30
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
OUTPUT DIODE MODULES TEST (continued)
FIGURE F.5 Machine Output Terminals
A MPS
V OLTS
CONTROL
WELD TERMINALS
REMOTE
LOCAL
OUTPUT
REMOTE
ON
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
SELECT
SELECT
SELECT ATTRIBUTE
TTRIBUTE
MEMORY BUTT
MEMOR
BUTTON
ON
SELECT KNOB
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
_
ADJUST ATTRIBUTE
TTRIBUTE
+
POSITIVE
OUTPUT
TERMINAL
NEGATIVE
OUTPUT
TERMINAL
TEST PROCEDURE
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.
2. Locate the output terminals on the front
panel of the machine. See Figure F.5.
3. Remove any output cables and load from the
output terminals.
4. Using the analog ohmmeter test for more
than 200 ohms resistance between positive
and negative output terminals. Positive test
lead to the positive terminal; Negative test
lead to the negative terminal. See Figure
F.6.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
NOTE: The polarity of the test leads is most
important. If the test leads polarity is not correct, the test will have erroneous results.
V350-PRO
F-30
OBE
_
+
- PR
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Figure F.6 Terminal Probes
E
Return to Section TOC
OUTPUT DIODE MODULES TEST (continued)
ROB
Return to Section TOC
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
+P
Return to Section TOC
F-31
5. If 200 ohms is measured then the output
diodes are not “shorted”.
NOTE: There is a 250 ohm resistor across the
welding output terminals.
6. If less than 200 ohms is measured, one or
more diodes or the snubber board may be
faulty.
7. Perform the Filter Capacitor Discharge
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
8. Locate the output diode modules and snubber board. See Figure F.7.
9. Test all output diode modules individually.
V350-PRO
NOTE: This may require the disassembly of
the leads and the snubber board from the
diode modules. Refer to the Output Diode
Modules Removal and Replacement
Procedure for detailed instructions.
F-31
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-32
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
OUTPUT DIODE MODULES TEST (continued)
Figure F.7 Snubber and Output Diode Locations
Output Diode
Modules
Snubber
Board
LEFT SIDE
V350-PRO
F-32
Return to Master TOC
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER TEST
WARNING
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this
manual.
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-33
DESCRIPTION
This procedure will determine if the correct voltage is being applied to the primary of auxiliary transformer and also if the correct voltage is being induced on the secondary windings
of the transformer.
MATERIALS NEEDED
Volt-ohmmeter (Multimeter)
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
5/16” Nut Driver
Wiring Diagram
This procedure takes approximately 25 minutes to perform.
V350-PRO
F-33
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-34
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER TEST (continued)
FIGURE F.8 Auxiliary Transformer
Auxiliary
Transformer
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Secondary Lead
Plugs P52
A
AM
PS
V
VO
LTS
A
OUT
CC
-ST
ICK
CC
701
-ST
8
ICK
TIG
601
GT
0
AW
CV
-W
IRE
CV
-FL
UX
CO
RE
D
PU
RM
IN
AL
S
CT
RN
D TE
HO
SE
T ST
AR
T
4
LE
CT
5
3
SE
LE
WA
WEL
T
6
AR
2
ING
1
MO
TE
NT
RO
8
0
RE
C CO
7
9
10
-4
-2
L
0
+2
-6
+4
-8
-10
SO
FT
+6
+8
+10
CR
ISP
PO
WE
R
ON
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
OF
F
TEST PROCEDURE
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver, remove the case
wraparound cover.
3. Perform the Input Capacitor Discharge
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.
Return to Master TOC
5. Locate the secondary leads and plug P52.
See Figure F.8 and F.9.
FIGURE F.9 Plug Lead Connections Viewed From Transformer Lead Side of Plug
532
Return to Section TOC
4. Locate the auxiliary transformer. See Figure
F.8.
24
42
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Plug P52
54
31
V350-PRO
541
F-34
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-35
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
F-35
AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER NO.1 TEST (continued)
TABLE F.4
LEAD IDENTIFICATION
NORMAL EXPECTED VOLTAGE
31 TO 532
115 VAC
42 TO 541
42 VAC
24 TO 541
24 VAC
54 TO 541
28 VAC
7. Carefully apply the correct input voltage to the
V350-PRO and check for the correct secondary voltages per table F.4. Make sure the
reconnect jumper lead and switch are configured correctly for the input voltage being
applied. Make sure circuit breaker (CB3) is
functioning properly.
NOTE: The secondary voltages will vary if the
input line voltage varies.
8. If the correct secondary voltages are present,
the auxiliary transformer is functioning properly. If any of the secondary voltages are missing or low, check to make certain the primary
is configured correctly for the input voltage
applied. See Wiring Diagram.
WARNING
High voltage is present at primary of
Auxiliary Transformer.
9. If the correct input voltage is applied to the
primary, and the secondary voltage(s) are not
correct, the auxiliary transformer may be
faulty.
10. Remove the input power to the V350-PRO.
11. Install the case wraparound cover using a
5/16” nut driver.
V350-PRO
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-36
F-36
NOTES
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-37
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR
CURRENT TRANSDUCER TEST
WARNING
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this
manual.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).
DESCRIPTION
This test will help determine if the current transducer and associated wiring are functioning
correctly.
MATERIALS NEEDED
Volt-ohmmeter
5/16” Nut Driver
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Resistive Load Bank
External DC Ammeter
This procedure takes approximately 45 minutes to perform.
V350-PRO
F-37
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
F-38
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR
F-38
CURRENT TRANSDUCER TEST (continued)
FIGURE F.10 Metal Plate Removal & Plug J8 Location
A
AM
PS
V
VO
LTS
A
OU
CC
TP
-S
TIC
K 70
-S
18
TIC
K 60
TIG
10
GT
AW
CV
-W
IRE
CV
-FL
UX
CO
RE
CC
S
LE
CT
IN
D TE
IN
AL
4
G
SE
LE
T ST
AR
T
CT
5
3
SE
RN
WEL
RM
HO
D
WA
UT
6
AR
2
7
1
8
0
RE
MO
10
TE
9
-4
C
CO
-2
NT
RO
L
0
+2
-6
+4
-8
-10
SO
FT
+6
+8
+1
CR 0
ISP
PO
WE
R
ON
OF
F
Plug J8
TEST PROCEDURE
6. Check for the correct DC supply voltages to
the current transducer at plug J8. See Figure
F.11.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.
2. Using the 5/16” nut driver, remove the case
wraparound cover.
A. Pin 2 (lead 802+) to pin 6 (lead 806-)
should read +15 VDC.
3. Perform the Input Capacitor Discharge
Procedure.
B. Pin 4 (lead 804+) to pin 6 (lead 806-)
should read -15 VDC.
4. Locate plug J8 on the control board. Do not
remove the plug from the P.C. Board.
7. If either of the supply voltages are low or missing, the control board may be faulty.
5. Apply the correct input power to the V350PRO.
FIGURE F.11. Plug J8 Viewed From Lead Side of Plug
802
804
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
801
Plug J8
806
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-39
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR
CURRENT TRANSDUCER TEST (continued)
TABLE F.5
OUTPUT LOAD CURRENT
EXPECTED TRANSDUCER FEEDBACK
VOLTAGE
300
2.4
250
2.0
200
1.6
150
1.2
100
0.8
8. Check the feedback voltage from the current
transducer using a resistive load bank and
with the V350-PRO in mode 200. Mode 200 is
a constant current test mode. This mode can
be accessed from the front panel of the V350
by pressing and holding the Mode Select button while turning the machine on. NOTE:
Machines with an Advanced Process Panels
do not have a mode select button. Use the
same procedure except hold in the Memory
button on the advanced process panel instead
of the mode select button. Then, rotate the
output knob while still holding the Mode Select
button in until the displays read “Mode 200”.
Release the Mode Select Button and the
machine will be in mode 200. With the V350PRO in mode 200, apply the grid load across
the output of the V350-PRO, set machine output to 300 amps and enable WELD TERMINALS. Adjust the grid load to obtain 300
amps on the external ammeter and check
feedback voltages per Table F.5.
9. If for any reason the machine cannot be
loaded to 300 amps, Table F.5. shows what
feedback voltage is produced at various current loads.
10. If the correct supply voltages are applied to
the current transducer, and with the machine
loaded, the feedback voltage is missing or not
correct the current transducer may be faulty.
Before replacing the current transducer, check
the leads and plugs between the control board
(J8) and the current transducer (J90). See The
Wiring Diagram. For access to plug J90 and
the current transducer refer to: Current
Transducer Removal and Replacement
Procedure.
11. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.
12. Replace the control box top and any cable ties
previously removed.
13. Install the case wraparound cover using the
5/16” nut driver.
Return to Master TOC
A. Pin 1 (lead 801) to Pin 6 (lead 806) should
read 2.4 VDC (machine loaded to 300
amps).
Return to Section TOC
F-39
V350-PRO
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-40
NOTES
V350-PRO
F-40
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-41
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR
FAN CONTROL AND MOTOR TEST
WARNING
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this
manual.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).
DESCRIPTION
This test will help determine if the fan motor, control board, switch board, or associated leads
and connectors are functioning correctly.
MATERIALS NEEDED
Voltmeter
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
5/16” Nut Driver
This procedure takes approximately 40 minutes to perform.
V350-PRO
F-41
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-42
F-42
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR
FAN CONTROL AND MOTOR TEST (continued)
TEST PROCEDURE
1. Remove the input power to the V350-PRO
machine.
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor Discharge
Procedure.
2. Using the 5/16” nut driver, remove the case
wraparound cover.
4. Locate plug J22 on the main switch board. Do
not remove the plug from the board. See
Figure F.12.
FIGURE F.12 PLUG J22 LOCATION
Return to Master TOC
J21
J20
Return to Master TOC
5. Carefully apply the correct input power to the
machine.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
J22
6. Carefully check for 115VAC at plug J22 pin-2
to J22 pin-3. (leads 32A to 31B(C) See Figure
F.13. WARNING: HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT THE MAIN SWITCH BOARD.
FIGURE F.13 PLUG J22
Fan Lead
1
2
Lead 32A
Lead 31B(C)
3
4
Fan Lead
Plug J22
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-43
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR
FAN CONTROL AND MOTOR TEST (continued)
7. If the 115VAC is low or not present check circuit breaker CB2 located on the front panel. If
the circuit breaker is OK, perform The
Auxiliary Transformer Test. Check plug J22,
circuit breaker CB2 and associated leads for
loose or faulty connections. See the Wiring
Diagram.
8. Energize the weld output terminals (Select
Weld Terminals ON) and carefully check for
115VAC at plug J22 pin-1 to J22 pin-4 (fan
leads). See Figure F.13. If the 115VAC is present and the fan is not running then the fan
motor may be faulty. Also check the associated leads between plug J22 and the fan motor
for loose or faulty connections. See the Wiring
Diagram. WARNING: HIGH VOLTAGE IS
PRESENT AT THE SWITCH BOARD.
9. If the 115VAC is NOT present in the previous
step then proceed to the fan control test.
FAN CONTROL TEST PROCEDURE
1. Locate plug J20 on the switch board. Do not
remove the plug from the switch board. See
Figure F.12 and F.14.
2. Energize the weld output terminals (Select
Weld Terminals ON) and carefully check for
+15VDC at plug J20 pin-6+ to J20 pin-2(leads 715 to 716). See Figure F.14. If the
15VDC is present and the fan is not running
then the switch board may be faulty. If the
15VDC is not present when the weld terminals
are energized then the control board may be
faulty. Also check plugs J20, J7, and all associated leads for loose or faulty connections.
See the Wiring Diagram.
WARNING: HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT
THE SWITCH BOARD.
3. Remove the input power to the V350-PRO.
Note: The fan motor may be accessed by the
removal of the rear panel detailed in The
Current
Transducer
Removal
and
Replacement Procedure.
4. Replace the case wrap-around cover.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
FIGURE F.14 PLUG J20
Return to Section TOC
F-43
Lead 716-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Lead 715+
Plug J20
V350-PRO
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-44
NOTES
V350-PRO
F-44
F-45
F-45
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR
SPI CABLE RESISTANCE AND VOLTAGE TEST
WARNING
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this
manual.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).
DESCRIPTION
This test will help determine if there is a possible “open” in the SPI cable and also determine
if the correct supply voltages are being applied to the boards in the SPI network.
MATERIALS NEEDED
Volt/Ohmmeter
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
5/16” Nut Driver
This procedure takes approximately 35 minutes to perform.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-46
F-46
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR
SPI CABLE RESISTANCE AND VOLTAGE TEST (continued)
TEST PROCEDURE
1. Remove the input power to the V350-PRO.
2. Using the 5/16” nut driver, remove the case
wraparound cover.
3. Perform the Capacitor Discharge Procedure.
8. Reconnect the plug into the control board and
perform the Display Board Replacement
Procedure.
9. With plug J3 still removed from the control
board, carefully apply the correct input power
to V350-PRO.
4. Perform the Display Board Removal
Procedure. Do not remove the SPI ribbon
cable connecting the display board to the
remote/status boards.
10. Turn on the machine.
5. Locate and remove plug J3 from the control
board. See Figure F.15.
12. Carefully check for the presence of +5VDC
from plug J3 pin -2(+) to plug J3 pin -10(-) at
the control board receptacle. See Figure F.15.
6. Check the resistance and continuity of the SPI
cable by testing with the ohmmeter from each
pin on plug J3 to the corresponding pins on
plug J34. See the Wiring Diagram.
7. The resistance reading pin to corresponding
pin should be zero ohms or very low resistance. If the resistance reading is high or
“open” check the plug connections to the SPI
network PC boards. If the connections are OK
and the resistance is high or “open” the SPI
cable may be faulty.
11. Carefully check for the presence of +15VDC
from plug J3 pin -1(+) to plug J3 pin -10(-) at
the control board receptacle. See Figure F.15.
13. If either of these voltages are low or not present, the control board may be faulty. Replace.
Also Perform the Power Board Test.
14. Remove the input power to the V350-PRO
machine.
15. Replace plug J3 into the control board.
16. Replace any cable ties previously removed.
17. Replace the case wrap-around cover.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
FIGURE F.15 Plug J3
Pin 1
Pin 2
Plug J3
J3
t
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
h
Rig
Pin 10
e
Sid
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-47
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
WARNING
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this
manual.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).
DESCRIPTION
This test will help determine if the machine is capable of producing welding output and to
check and adjust, if necessary, the voltage and or current calibration.
MATERIALS NEEDED
Resistive Load Bank
Calibrated Test Voltmeter
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Calibrated Test Ammeter
This procedure takes approximately 20 minutes to perform.
V350-PRO
F-47
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-48
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE (continued)
CALIBRATION CHECK
VOLTAGE CALIBRATION
The calibration of the V350-PRO can be checked
using a resistive load bank with the V350-PRO in
mode 200. Mode 200 is a constant current test
mode.
1. Connect the resistive load band (approximately .087 ohms) and test voltmeter to the welding
output terminals.
1. Press and hold in the Mode Select button.
2. Press and hold in the Mode Select/Memory
button.
2. Turn on the V350-PRO.
3. Turn on the V350-PRO.
3. Rotate the output knob, while still holding the
mode select button in, until the displays read
“mode 200”.
NOTE: Machines with an
Advanced Process Panels do not have a mode
select button. Use the same procedure except
hold in the Memory button on the advanced
process panel instead of the mode select button.
4. Rotate the Output Control knob until the display reads “vol cAL”.
4. Release the Mode Select/Memory button and
the machine will be in mode 200.
5. With the machine in mode 200 apply a resistive
load to the welding output terminals (approximately .087 ohms) set the machine output to
300 amps and enable the Weld Terminals.
(Weld Terminals Select ON).
6. Using the test meters note the output voltage
and current.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
7. The V350-PRO voltmeter must match the test
meter reading to within +/- 1 volt.
Return to Section TOC
F-48
5. Release the Mode Select/Memory button.
6. Adjust the output control knob until the actual
output voltage reading on the test volt meter is
20volts +/- .5 volts.
7. Wait for the machine’s output to be automatically turned off and then back on.
8. Adjust the Output Control knob again if necessary to make the actual voltage output 20 volts
+/- .5 volts.
9. Wait for the machine’s output to be automatically turned off and then back on.
10. Repeat the above two steps if necessary.
11. Press and release the Mode Select/Memory
button to save the calibration.
8. The V350-PRO ammeter must match the test
meter within +/- 5 amps.
9. If the voltmeter does not meet the specification
then proceed to the Voltage Calibration
Procedure.
10. If the ammeter does not meet the specification
then proceed to the Current Calibration
Procedure.
NOTE: Before attempting to calibrate the voltage
or current setting of the V350-PRO, be sure to read
the entire voltage or current calibration section. If
the steps are not completed quickly, the machine
will automatically leave the calibration mode without changing the calibration settings. The voltage
and current calibration settings of the V350-PRO
are completely independent of each other.
Adjusting one will not affect the other.
V350-PRO
NOTE: If the Mode Select/Memory button is
not pressed within 30 seconds after adjusting
the Output Control knob the machine will leave
the calibration mode and use the previous calibration settings.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-49
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE (continued)
CURRENT CALIBRATION
PROCEDURE
1. Connect the resistive load band (approximately .087 ohms) and test ammeter to the
welding output terminals.
2. Press and hold in the Mode Select/Memory
button.
3. Turn on the V350-PRO.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
4. Rotate the Output Control knob until the
display reads “cur cAL”.
10. Adjust the Output Control knob again if
necessary to make the actual output current reading on the test ammeter 300
amps +/-2A.
11. Wait for the machines output to be a u t o matically turned off and then back on.
12. Repeat the above two steps if necessary.
5. Release the Mode Select/Memory button.
13. Press
and
release
the
Mode
Select/Memory button to save the calibration.
6. The left display will change to “IcAL” to
indicate that current calibration is in
progress.
14. The left display will scroll the message IcAL
SAVEd.
7. The right display will scroll the following
message: Adj oCP SorEAL cur-300A.
15. The machine will reset to normal operation.
8. Adjust the Output Control knob until the
actual output current reading on the test
ammeter is 300amps +/-2A.
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
9. Wait for the machines output to be
automatically turned off and then back on.
V350-PRO
NOTE: If the Mode Select/Memory button
is not pressed within 30 seconds after
adjusting the Output Control knob the
machine will leave the calibration mode
and use the previous calibration settings.
F-49
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-50
NOTES
V350-PRO
F-50
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-51
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
CONTROL BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
WARNING
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this
manual.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353) (WELD).
DESCRIPTION
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing the control board for maintenance
or replacement.
MATERIALS NEEDED
5/16” Nut Driver
3/8” Nut Driver
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Flathead Screwdriver
Phillips Head Screwdriver
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
This procedure takes approximately 30 minutes to perform.
V350-PRO
F-51
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-52
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
CONTROL BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
FIGURE F.16 - CONTROL BOARD LOCATION
AM
PS
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
A
V
VO
LTS
A
OU
CC
-ST
ICK
701
-ST
8
ICK
TIG
601
GT
0
AW
CV
-W
IRE
CV
-FL
UX
CO
RE
TP
CC
RN
WE
LD
TE
RM
INAL
S
HO
D
CT
LE
CT
5
3
LE
SE
T ST
AR
T
4
SE
WA
UT
6
AR
2
ING
8
0
RE
MO
TE
C CO
NT
RO
7
1
10
9
-4
-2
L
0
+2
-6
+4
-8
-10
SO
FT
+6
+8
+10
CR
ISP
PO
WE
R
ON
OF
F
Control Board
PROCEDURE
4. Locate the control board behind the front panel of
the machine. See Figure F.16.
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the case wraparound cover.
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor Discharge
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.
5. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the two screws
from the bottom of the front of the machine. See
Figure F.17.
FIGURE F.17 CASE FRONT SCREW REMOVAL
A MPS
V OLTS
CONTROL
WELD TERMINALS
REMOTE
LOCAL
OUTPUT
REMOTE
ON
SELECT
SELECT
SELECT ATTRIBUTE
TTRIBUTE
MEMORY BUTT
MEMOR
BUTTON
ON
Return to Master TOC
SELECT KNOB
Return to Section TOC
F-52
Phillips Head
Screws
ADJUST ATTRIBUTE
TTRIBUTE
Flathead Screws
_
+
5/16" Screws
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-53
F-53
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
CONTROL BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
FIGURE F.18. - CONTROL BOARD ALL PLUG LOCATIONS
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
J3
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
J4
A
AM
PS
V
VO
LTS
J10B
A
OU
CC
-STI
CK
CC
-STI 7018
CK
TIG
60
10
GT
AW
CV
-W
IRE
CV
-FLU
X CO
RE
D
WA
TP
IN
WE
LD
TE
RM
INA
LS
HO
G
SE
T ST
AR
T
4
SE
LE
CT
RN
UT
LE
CT
5
3
6
AR
2
7
1
MO
TE
TR
8
0
RE
CC
ON
10
9
-4
-2
OL
0
J10A
+2
-6
+4
-8
-1
SO 0
FT
+6
+8
+1
CR 0
ISP
PO
W
ER
ON
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
OF
F
8. The front of the machine may now gently be pulled
forward to gain access to the display Board. Note:
The front of the machine cannot be removed completely, only pulled forward a few inches.
CAUTION
Observe static precautions detailed in PC
Board Troubleshooting Procedures at the
beginning of this section.
9. Beginning at the right side of the control board
remove plugs J10A and J10B. Note: Be sure to
label each plugs position upon removal. See
Figure F.18.
6. Using a flat head screwdriver remove the two
screws and their washers from above and below
the input power switch. See Figure F.17.
10. Working your way across the top of the board
from right to left, label and remove plugs #J9, #J8,
#J7, #J6, and #J5. See Figure F.18.
7. Using a phillips head screwdriver remove the four
screws from around the two welder output terminals on the front of the machine. See Figure F.17.
11. Working your way down the left side of the board,
label and remove plugs #J4 and #J3. See Figure
F.18.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-54
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
F-54
CONTROL BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
12. Using a 3/8” nut driver remove the two mounting
nuts from the top two corners of the control
board. See Figure F.19.
14. Replace the control board.
13. Cut any necessary cable ties.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
FIGURE F.19 CONTROL BOARD MOUNTING SCREW LOCATION
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Mounting
Nuts (3/8")
t
h
ig
e
d
i
S
R
15. Replace the two 3/8” mounting nuts at the top
two corners of the control board.
19. Replace the four screws from around the two
welder output terminals on the front of the
machine.
16. Replace any previously removed cable ties.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
17. Replace plugs #J3, #J4, #J5, #J6, #J7, #J8, #J9,
#J10B, and #J10A previously removed.
20. Replace the two case front mounting screws at
the bottom of the front of the machine.
21. Replace the case wraparound cover.
18. Replace the two screws and their washers from
above and below the input power switch.
22. Perform the Voltage and Current Calibration
Procedure.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-55
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
DISPLAY BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
WARNING
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this
manual.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call or 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).
DESCRIPTION
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing the display board for maintenance
or replacement.
MATERIALS NEEDED
5/16” Nut Driver
Flathead Screwdriver
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Phillips Head Screwdriver
This procedure takes approximately 30 minutes to perform.
V350-PRO
F-55
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-56
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
DISPLAY BOARD REMOVAL & REPLACEMENT (continued)
FIGURE F.20. – DISPLAY BOARD LOCATION
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Display Board
Mode Board
or Advanced
Process Board
L1
L1
11
07
CS
71
11
D1
30
-1
-2
ST
AT
US
IN
PU
T
MO
DE
SE
LE
CT
L11
110
A
-1
AM
PS
V
VO
LTS
A
OU
CC
TP
-STI
CK
-STI 7018
CK
TIG
60
10
GT
AW
CV
-W
IRE
CV
-FLU
X CO
RE
CC
LE
CT
IN
G
6
TE
RM
IN
AL
S
CT
AR
C
RO
8
10
9
CO
NT
7
0
MO
LE
5
2
1
RE
D TE
SE
T ST
AR
T
4
3
SE
RN
WEL
HO
D
WA
UT
-4
-2
L
0
+2
-6
+4
-8
-10
SO
FT
+6
+8
+1
CR 0
ISP
PO
WE
R
ON
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
OF
F
PROCEDURE
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the case
wraparound cover.
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor
Discharge Procedure detailed earlier in this
section.
4. Locate the display board behind the front
panel of the machine. See Figure F.20.
V350-PRO
F-56
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-57
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
DISPLAY BOARD REMOVAL & REPLACEMENT (continued)
FIGURE F.21. – CASE FRONT SCREW LOCATION
A MPS
V OLTS
CONTROL
WELD TERMINALS
REMOTE
LOCAL
OUTPUT
REMOTE
ON
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
SELECT
SELECT ATTRIBUTE
MEMORY BUTTON
SELECT KNOB
Phillips Head
Screws
ADJUST ATTRIBUTE
Flathead Screws
_
+
5/16" Screws
5. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the two
screws from the bottom of the front of the
machine. See Figure F.21.
6. Using a flat head screwdriver remove the two
screws and their washers from above and
below the input power switch. See Figure
F.21.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
SELECT
Return to Section TOC
F-57
8. The front of the machine may now gently be
pulled forward to gain access to the display
Board. Note: The front of the machine cannot
be removed completely, only pulled forward a
few inches.
9. The display board is now accessible to
replace.
7. Using a phillips head screwdriver remove the
four screws from around the two welder output terminals on the front of the machine. See
Figure F.21.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-58
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
DISPLAY BOARD REMOVAL & REPLACEMENT (continued)
10. Remove plug J37 from the display board. See the
Wiring Diagram.
11. Remove plug J3 originating from the control
board located directly across from the display
board. See the Wiring Diagram.
12. Remove the display board. Note: Gentle prying
from behind the board may be required.
13. Replace the display board.
\15. Replace the four phillips head screws removed
from the front of the machine located around the
two welder output terminals.
16. Replace the two flat head screws and their washers mounting the input power switch.
17. Using a 5/16” nut driver replace the two screws
previously removed from the bottom front of the
machine.
18. Replace the case wraparound cover.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
14. Replace plugs #J3 and #J37 previously removed.
Return to Section TOC
F-58
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
MAIN SWITCH BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
WARNING
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this
manual.
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-59
DESCRIPTION
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing the main switch board for maintenance or replacement.
MATERIALS NEEDED
5/16” Nut Driver
Flathead Screwdriver
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
7/16” mm Socket
3/16” Allen Wrench
3/8” Nut Driver
This procedure takes approximately 35 minutes to perform.
V350-PRO
F-59
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-60
MAIN SWITCH BOARD REMOVAL & REPLACEMENT (continued)
FIGURE F.22. – MAIN SWITCH BOARD LEAD LOCATIONS
202
207
J22
-
+
-
Return to Master TOC
201
Return to Section TOC
F-60
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
+
209
204
205
208
J21
J20
-
+
-
+
206
203
1. Remove the input power to the V350-PRO.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
PROCEDURE
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the case wraparound cover.
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor Discharge
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.
Return to Master TOC
6. Using a 7/16” socket, remove leads 201, 202,
203, 204, 205, 206, 207, 208, 209 from the
switch board. Note lead terminal locations and
washer positions upon removal.
7. Locate and disconnect the three harness plugs
associated with the main switch board. Plugs
#J20, #J21, #J22. See Figure F.22.
CAUTION
Return to Section TOC
5. Using a 5/16” and 3/8” nut driver remove the
input lead shield from the area at the bottom of
the main switch board.
Observe static precautions detailed in PC Board
Troubleshooting Procedures at the beginning of
this section. Failure to do so can result in permanent damage to equipment.
8. Locate the eight capacitor terminals and
remove the nuts using a 7/16” socket or nut
driver. Note the position of the washers behind
each nut for replacement.
4. Locate the main switch board and all associated plug and lead connections. See figure F.22.
See Wiring Diagram.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-61
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
MAIN SWITCH BOARD REMOVAL & REPLACEMENT (continued)
FIGURE F.23. – 3/16” ALLEN BOLT LOCATION
-
+
-
+
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
3/16" ALLEN BOLTS
-
+
-
9. Using a 3/16” allen wrench remove four allen
bolts and washers as shown in Figure F.23.
At this point, the board is ready for removal.
Carefully remove the board from the 4 nylon
mounting pins. Note: Depress the retaining
pins on the sides of the nylon mounts to
release the board. See Figure F.24.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
10. Carefully maneuver the board out of the
machine.
11. Apply a thin coat of Penetrox A-13 to the
IGBT heatsinks on the back of the new
switch boards mating surfaces. Note: Keep
compound away from the mounting holes.
12. Mount the new board on the nylon m o u n t ing pins.
+
13. Replace the four allen bolts and washers
previously removed.
14. Replace the eight capacitor terminal nuts,
washers, and necessary leads previously
removed.
15. Reconnect the three harness plugs previously removed.
16. Reconnect the nine leads (#201-#209) that
were previously removed.
17. Pre-torque all screws to 25 inch lbs. before
tightening to 44 inch lbs.
18. Replace the case wraparound cover.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
FIGURE F.24. – NYLON MOUNTING PIN
DEPRESS
LOCKING TAB ON
MOUNTING PIN
V350-PRO
F-61
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-62
NOTES
V350-PRO
F-62
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-63
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
ADVANCED PROCESS PANEL
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
WARNING
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this
manual.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).
DESCRIPTION
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing the mode board for maintenance
or replacement.
MATERIALS NEEDED
5/16” Nut Driver
Small Flathead Screwdriver
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Flathead Screwdriver
Small Phillips Head Screwdriver
Phillips Head Screwdriver
9/16” Wrench
This procedure takes approximately 40 minutes to perform.
V350-PRO
F-63
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
F-64
ADVANCED PROCESS PANEL
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-64
FIGURE F.25. – MODE BOARD LOCATION
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Display Board
Mode Board
or Advanced
Process Board
L1
L1
11
07
CS
71
11
D1
30
-1
-2
ST
AT
US
IN
PU
T
MO
DE
SE
LE
CT
L11
110
A
-1
AM
PS
V
VO
LTS
A
OU
CC
TP
-STI
CK
CC
-STI 7018
CK
TIG
60
10
GT
AW
CV
-W
IRE
CV
-FLU
X CO
RE
LE
CT
IN
G
6
TE
RM
IN
AL
S
CT
AR
C
RO
8
10
9
CO
NT
7
0
MO
LE
5
2
1
RE
D TE
SE
T ST
AR
T
4
3
SE
RN
WEL
HO
D
WA
UT
-4
-2
L
0
+2
-6
+4
-8
-10
SO
FT
+6
+8
+1
CR 0
ISP
PO
WE
R
F
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
ON
OF
PROCEDURE
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the case
wraparound cover.
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor
Discharge Procedure detailed earlier in this
section.
4. Locate the advanced process board behind
the front panel of the machine. See Figure
F.25.
V350-PRO
F-65
F-65
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
ADVANCED PROCESS PANEL
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
FIGURE F.26. – CASE FRONT SCREW REMOVAL
A MPS
V OLTS
Return to Master TOC
OUTPUT
SELECT
SELECT ATTRIBUTE
TTRIBUTE
MEMORY BUTTON
MEMOR
BUTTON
SELECT KNOB
Return to Master TOC
ADJUST ATTRIBUTE
TTRIBUTE
Flathead Screws
_
+
5/16" Screws
5. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the two screws
from the bottom of the front of the machine.
See Figure F.26.
6. Using a flat head screwdriver remove the two
screws and their washers from above and
below the input power switch. See Figure
F.26..
Return to Section TOC
REMOTE
ON
SELECT
Phillips Head
Screws
Return to Section TOC
WELD TERMINALS
REMOTE
LOCAL
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
CONTROL
7. Using a phillips head screwdriver remove the
four screws from around the two welder output
terminals on the front of the machine. See
Figure F.26.
8. The front of the machine may now gently be
pulled forward to gain access to the mode
board. Note: The front of the machine cannot
be removed completely, only pulled forward a
few inches.
V350-PRO
ADVANCED PROCESS PANEL
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
FIGURE F.27.. – CASE FRONT
A MPS
V OLTS
CONTROL
WELD TERMINALS
OUTPUT
SELECT
5/16" Screws
SELECT ATTRIBUTE
TTRIBUTE
MEMORY BUTT
MEMOR
BUTTON
ON
SELECT KNOB
ADJUST ATTRIBUTE
TTRIBUTE
Adjust Knob
Select Knob
Return to Master TOC
_
Return to Section TOC
REMOTE
ON
SELECT
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
REMOTE
LOCAL
+
9. Remove plug #J33 from the remote board. See
the Wiring Diagram.
10. Open the cover of the weld mode display on
the front of the machine.
11. Using a 5/16” nut driver, remove the three 5/16”
screws as shown in Figure F.27.
Return to Master TOC
12. Place both knobs in the six o’clock position.
Return to Section TOC
F-66
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-66
13. Using a small flathead screwdriver, loosen the
screw in the “Select” knob and the “Adjust”
knob. The knobs should slide off of their
shafts. See Figure F.28.
14. Using a 9/16” wrench remove the nuts and their
washers behind the two knobs previously
removed.
15. Perform the Remote Board
Procedure. (Start at step #10)
Removal
16. Using a phillips head screwdriver remove the
two phillips head mounting screws at the bottom of the Advanced Process board.
17. Remove the Advanced Process board.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-67
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
F-67
ADVANCED PROCESS PANEL
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
FIGURE F.28. – SCREW IN CAP
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Small Flathead
Screwdriver
18. Replace the Advanced Process board.
19. Replace the two phillips head screws at the
bottom of the advanced process board.
20. Perform the Remote Board Replacement
Procedure.
21. Replace the 9/16” nuts and their washers
behind the “Adjust” and “Select” knobs.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
22. Using a small screwdriver replace the two
knobs previously removed.
25. Replace the four phillips head screws removed
from the front of the machine located around
the two welder output terminals.
26. Replace the two flat head screws and their
washers from around the input power switch.
27. Using a 5/16” nut driver replace the two
screws previously removed from the bottom
front of the machine
28. Replace the case wraparound cover.
23. Replace the three 5/16” screws previously
removed from the front of the machine located
around the Advanced Process board.
24. Reconnect plug #J33 previously removed.
V350-PRO
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-68
NOTES
V350-PRO
F-68
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-69
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
REMOTE BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
WARNING
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this
manual.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).
DESCRIPTION
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing the status board for maintenance
or replacement.
MATERIALS NEEDED
5/16” Nut Driver
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Flathead Screwdriver
Phillips Head Screwdriver
This procedure takes approximately 30 minutes to perform.
V350-PRO
F-69
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-70
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
REMOTE BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
PROCEDURE
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor Discharge
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the case wraparound cover.
4. Locate the remote board behind the front panel of
the machine. See Figure F.29.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
FIGURE F.29. – REMOTE BOARD LOCATION
Remote Board
Display Board
Mode Board
or Advanced
Process Board
L1
L1
11
07
CS
71
11
D1
30
-1
-2
ST
AT
US
IN
PU
T
MOD
E SE
LE
CT
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
L11
110
Return to Section TOC
F-70
A
-1
AM
PS
V
VO
LTS
A
OU
CC
TP
-S
TIC
K 70
CC
-S
18
TIC
K 60
TIG
10
GT
AW
CV
-W
IR
E
CV
-FL
UX
CO
RE
D
4
LE
CT
RN
WEL
D TE
RM
INAL
S
HO
T ST
AR
T
SE
LE
CT
5
3
SE
WA
UT
6
7
1
8
0
RE
MO
TE
AR
C CO
NT
RO
L
2
ING
10
9
-4
-2
0
+2
-6
+4
-8
-10
SO
FT
+6
+8
+1
CR 0
ISP
PO
WE
R
ON
OF
F
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-71
F-71
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
REMOTE BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
5. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the two screws
from the bottom front of the machine. See Figure
F.30.
6. Using a flat head screwdriver remove the two
screws and their washers from around the input
power switch. See Figure F.30.
8. The front of the machine may now gently be pulled
forward to gain access to the remote Board.
Note: The front of the machine cannot be removed
completely, only pulled forward a few inches.
9. The remote board is now accessible to replace.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
7. Using a phillips head screwdriver remove the four
screws from around the two welder output terminals on the front of the machine. See Figure F.30.
FIGURE F.30. – FRONT SCREW REMOVAL
A MPS
V OLTS
CONTROL
WELD TERMINALS
REMOTE
LOCAL
OUTPUT
REMOTE
ON
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
SELECT
SELECT
SELECT ATTRIBUTE
TTRIBUTE
MEMORY BUTTON
MEMOR
BUTTON
SELECT KNOB
Phillips Head
Screws
ADJUST ATTRIBUTE
TTRIBUTE
Flathead Screws
_
+
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
5/16" Screws
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-72
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
REMOTE BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
10. Remove plug J37 from the display board. See
Wiring Diagram.
17. Replace plug J37 previously removed from the
display board.
11. Remove plugs J33, J333 and J331 from the
remote board.
18. Replace the four phillips head screws removed
from the front of the machine located around the
two welder output terminals.
12. Using a flat head screwdriver, remove the two
mounting screws and washers from the bottom of
the remote board. See Figure F.31.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
19. Replace the two flat head screws and their washers from around the input power switch.
20. Using a 5/16” nut driver replace the two screws
previously removed from the bottom front of the
machine
13. Remove the remote board.
14. Replace the remote board.
15. Replace the two flat head mounting screws and
washers previously removed from the bottom of
the remote board.
21. Replace the case wraparound cover.
16. Replace plugs J331, J333, J33 and previously
removed from the remote board.
FIGURE F.31. – REMOTE BOARD (PLUG LOCATION)
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
J33
Return to Section TOC
F-72
Remote
Board
J333
J331
Flathead
Mounting Screws
V350-PRO
F-73
F-73
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
SNUBBER BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
WARNING
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this
manual.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).
DESCRIPTION
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing the snubber board for maintenance or replacement.
MATERIALS NEEDED
5/16” Nut Driver
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
This procedure takes approximately 15 minutes to perform.
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
7/16 Socket or Nut Driver
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-74
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
F-74
SNUBBER BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
PROCEDURE
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor Discharge
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the case wraparound cover.
4. Locate the snubber board.. See Figure F.32.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
FIGURE F.32. – SNUBBER BOARD LOCATION
Snubber
Board
LEFT SIDE
5. Remove small lead #B1 from the board.
Figure F.33.
See
7. Carefully remove the snubber board.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
8. Replace the snubber board.
6. Remove the four bolts using a 7/16” socket. Two
of these bolts have leads #30 and #10 connected
to them. Note the position of all leads and associated washers upon removal.
9. Replace the bolts, leads, and washers previously
removed. Torque bolt to 30-40 Inch Lbs.
10. Replace the case wraparound cover.
FIGURE F.33. – SNUBBER BOARD LEADS (CLOSE UP)
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Lead 30
Lead B1
Lead 20
V350-PRO
F-75
F-75
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
POWER BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
WARNING
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this
manual.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).
DESCRIPTION
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing the power board for maintenance
or replacement.
MATERIALS NEEDED
5/16” Nut Driver
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
3/8” Nut Driver
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
This procedure takes approximately 20 minutes to perform.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-76
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
F-76
POWER BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
FIGURE F.34. POWER BOARD LOCATION
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
POWER BOARD
LEFT SIDE
PROCEDURE
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor Discharge
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the case wraparound cover.
4. Locate the power board. See Figure F.34.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-77
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
POWER BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
5. Locate the three plug connections. J41, J42 and
J43. See figure F.35.
6. Carefully remove the three plugs from the power
board.
7. Remove the three nuts and at the corners of the
board using a 3/8” nut driver. Board is ready for
removal.
9. Replace with new power board.
10. Secure the new power board into its proper position with the three 3/8” nuts previously removed.
11. Replace the three plugs previously removed.
Plugs J41, J42 and J43.
12. Replace the case wraparound cover.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
8. Remove the power board.
Return to Section TOC
F-77
FIGURE F.35. – POWER BOARD LEAD LOCATION
J42
J41
V350-PRO
J43
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-78
NOTES
V350-PRO
F-78
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-79
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
INPUT RECTIFIER REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
WARNING
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this
manual.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).
DESCRIPTION
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing the input rectifier for maintenance
or replacement.
MATERIALS NEEDED
3/16” Allen wrench
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
5/16” Nut Driver
Flathead Screwdriver
Penetrox A-13 Heatsink Compound
Silicon Sealant
This procedure takes approximately 30 minutes to perform.
V350-PRO
F-79
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-80
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
INPUT RECTIFIER REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
PROCEDURE
6. Remove the six screws from the terminals using a
flathead screwdriver. Carefully note the position of
all leads and their positions upon removal. See
Figure F.37.
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the case
wraparound cover.
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor Discharge
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.
7. Using a 3/16”in. allen wrench remove the two
mounting screws and washers from the input
bridge. See Figure F.37.
4. Locate the input rectifier. See figure F.36.
8. Remove the input bridge.
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
5. Carefully remove the silicon sealant insulating the
six input rectifier terminals.
FIGURE F.36. – INPUT RECTIFIER LOCATION
INPUT
RECTIFIER
A
AM
PS
V
VO
LTS
A
CC
-S
CC
-S
TIC
OU
TP
K 70
18
TIC
K 60
TIG
10
GTA
W
CV
-W
IR
E
CV
-FLU
XC
OR
E
TE
S
CT
IN
LD
INA
L
G
5
3
LE
RN
WE
RM
TS
4
SE
WA
UT
HO
D
SE
LE
TA
CT
RT
6
AR
2
C
TE
10
9
CO
RO
8
0
MO
NT
7
1
RE
-4
-2
L
0
+2
-6
+4
-8
-1
SO 0
FT
+6
+8
+1
CR 0
ISP
PO
W
ER
ON
Return to Master TOC
O FF
Return to Section TOC
F-80
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-81
F-81
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
INPUT RECTIFIER REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
9. Apply a thin coat of Penetrox A-13 heatsink compound to the point of contact between the input
rectifier and the mounting surface.
10. Secure the new input bridge into its proper position with the two 3/16”in. allen mounting screws
previously removed. Torque to 44 inch pounds.
11. Reconnect the previously removed leads to their
proper locations. Torque to 31 inch pounds.
12. Cover the input rectifier and its six terminals with
silicon sealant.
13. Replace the case wraparound cover.
Return to Master TOC
Small Lead "H1"
To Auxiliary Transformer
3/16" ALLEN
BOLTS
C
B
#207
#207A
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
FIGURE F.37. – INPUT RECTIFIER (CLOSE-UP)
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
A
#209
FRONT
REAR
V350-PRO
Small Lead "A"
To Circuit Breaker
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-82
NOTES
V350-PRO
F-82
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-83
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
OUTPUT RECTIFIER MODULES REMOVAL AND
REPLACEMENT
WARNING
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this
manual.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).
DESCRIPTION
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing the output rectifier modules for
maintenance or replacement.
MATERIALS NEEDED
3/16” Allen wrench
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
9/64” Allen wrench
5/16” Nut Driver
7/16” Wrench
Flathead Screwdriver
Penetrox A-13 Heatsink Compound
Thin Knife/Screwdriver
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
This procedure takes approximately 30 minutes to perform.
V350-PRO
F-83
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-84
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
OUTPUT RECTIFIER MODULES
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
PROCEDURE
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the case wraparound cover.
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor Discharge
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
4. Locate the output diode modules located behind
the snubber board. See figure F.38.
5. Before the output rectifier modules can be
reached, the Snubber Board Removal
Procedure must be performed.
6. After the snubber board is removed, remove the
four leads connected to the modules using a 3/16”
allen wrench. These leads are #X4, #X2, #20, #40.
Note their positions for reassembly. See Figure
F.39.
7. Remove the copper plates from the tops of the
modules.
FIGURE F.38. – OUTPUT RECTIFIER MODULE LEAD LOCATIONS
Output Diode
Modules
Snubber
Board
Return to Master TOC
LEFT SIDE
Return to Section TOC
F-84
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-85
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
OUTPUT RECTIFIER MODULES
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
8. Under the copper plate previously removed, there
is an allen bolt. Remove it using a 9/64” allen
wrench. See Figure F.39.
13. The screw threads may catch on the threads of
the heat sink, so be sure to get the face of the
screw into contact with the surface of the module
(using just hand torque).
9. Using a 7/16” socket remove the mounting bolts at
the top and bottom of the modules. See Figure
F.39.
14. Using a 7/16” socket, tighten each mounting bolt
to between 5 and 10 inch pounds.
10. The output rectifier modules are ready for removal
and/or replacement.
15 Tighten the center allen screw to between 12 and
18 inch pounds.
11. Before replacing the diode module, apply a thin
even coat of Penetrox A-13 heatsink compound
to the bottom surface of the diode module. Note:
Keep the compound away from the mounting
holes.
16. Tighten each mounting bolt again (30 to 40 inch
pounds this time).
12. Press the module firmly against the sink while
aligning the mounting holes. Insert each outer
screw through a spring washer and then a plain
washer and into the holes. Start threading all
three screws into the heat sink (2 or 3 turns by
hand).
15. Replace leads #X2, #X4, #20, #40 to their original
terminals in their proper positions. Torque bolts to
30-40 Inch Pounds.
16. Perform the Snubber Board Replacement
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.
17. Replace the case wraparound cover.
FIGURE F.39. – OUTPUT RECTIFIER MODULE MOUNTING BOLT LOCATIONS
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
40
Return to Section TOC
F-85
20
Mounting
Bolts
X4 X2
3/16" Allen
Bolts
9/64" Allen
Bolts
Mounting
Bolts
V350-PRO
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-86
NOTES
V350-PRO
F-86
F-87
F-87
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
CURRENT TRANSDUCER REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
WARNING
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this
manual.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).
DESCRIPTION
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing the current transducer for
maintenance or replacement.
MATERIALS NEEDED
5/16” Nut Driver
1/4” Nut Driver
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
1/2” Nut driver
3/8” Nut Driver
Channel Locks
Flathead Screwdriver
Phillips Head Screwdriver
Hammer
Crescent Wrench
Pliers
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
This procedure takes approximately 45 minutes to perform.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-88
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
CURRENT TRANSDUCER REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
PROCEDURE
4. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the four screws
from the bottom and right side of the rear assembly. See Figure F.40.
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the case wraparound cover.
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor Discharge
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
FIGURE F.40. – CASE BACK SCREW LOCATIONS
REAR
OFF
OFF
OFF
Return to Master TOC
Plastic
Nut
Return to Section TOC
F-88
5/16" Mounting Screws
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-89
F-89
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
CURRENT TRANSDUCER REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
5. Label and remove the five leads connected to the
reconnect panel. Pliers may be necessary.
6. Label and remove the two leads connected to the
CB2 circuit breaker.
7. Using a crescent wrench, remove the large plastic
nut from around the input power line located at bottom of the rear assembly. See Figure F.41.
9. Using a hammer and a flathead screwdriver, firmly
tap the metal nut from the bottom of one of its ribs.
This tapping will loosen the nut. Note: Be sure to
tap from the bottom so the nut loosens in a counter
clockwise fashion if viewed from the front of the
machine.
10. Using a 3/8” nut driver label and remove leads
#202, #203, #206, #207A from the reconnect
switches. See Figure F.41.
8. Locate the steel nut located directly on the other
side of the rear assembly behind the plastic nut
that was previously removed. See Figure F.41.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
FIGURE F.41. LEAD LOCATIONS
#206
#202
#207A
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
#203
A
AM
PS
V
VO
LTS
A
OU
TP
LIN
C
ELOLN
EC
TR
IC
WA
RN
IN
G
IN
R EM
O TE
VE
UT
WE
LD
TE
RM
IN
AL
S
SE
LE
CT
RT
EC
V3
50
-P
RO
PO
W
ut Nut
N
tal stic
e
M Pla
ER
ON
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
O FF
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-90
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
CURRENT TRANSDUCER REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
11. The back of the machine may now gently be
pulled away to gain access to the current transducer. Note: The rear of the machine cannot be
removed completely.
16. Using a 3/8” wrench, remove the three mounting
screws from the output diode heatsink assembly.
Take note placement of insulation for reassembly.
See Figure F.42.
12. Carefully swing the rear of the machine open to
the left while facing the rear of the machine.
17. Cut any necessary cable ties and carefully remove
the heavy lead from the diode heatsink using a
1/2” nut driver.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
13. Perform the
Procedure.
Snubber
Board
Removal
18. Remove the output diode heatsink assembly
through the rear of the machine.
14. Remove leads #X2 and #20 from the output diode
module.
19. Remove plug #J90 from the current transducer.
15. Remove leads #X4 and #40 from the other output
diode module.
20. Using a 3/8” nut driver, remove the two mounting
nuts from the current transducer.
FIGURE F.42– OUTPUT HEATSINK MOUNTING SCREW LOCATION
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
3/8"
MOUNTING
BOLTS
Return to Section TOC
F-90
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-91
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
F-91
CURRENT TRANSDUCER REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)
21. Replace the current transducer.
22. Replace the two 3/8” mounting nuts previously
removed.
23. Reconnect plug #J90 to the current transducer.
30. Using a 3/8” wrench, replace leads #202, #203,
#206, and #207A previously removed from the
reconnect switches.
31. Tighten the metal nut previously removed from the
inside of the rear wall on the back of the machine.
Channel locks may be necessary.
24. Replace any necessary cable ties previously cut.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
25. From the rear of the machine, replace the heavy
flex lead to the bottom of the output diode
heatsink assembly using a 1/2” wrench. Note:
Don’t forget to include all washers.
32. Replace the large plastic nut from around input
power line located at the back of the machine.
33. Replace the five leads to the reconnect panel in
their proper locations.
26. Replace the output diode heatsink assembly previously removed using a 3/8” wrench.
34. Replace the two CB2 circuit breaker leads previously removed.
Note: Be sure to place insulation in its original
location.
35. Using a 5/16” nut driver, replace the four screws
at the bottom and right side of the rear assembly.
27. Replace leads X2, #20, X4, # 40 previously
removed from the two output diode modules.
Torque to 30-40 inch lbs.
36. Replace the case wraparound cover.
37. Perform the Voltage and Current Calibration
Procedure.
28. Perform the Snubber Board Replacement
Procedure.
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
29. The rear of the machine may now be placed back
into its original position.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-92
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR
RETEST AFTER REPAIR
Retest a machine:
If it is rejected under test for any reason that requires you to remove any part which could affect the
machine’s electrical characteristics.
If you repair or replace any electrical components:
Press and hold the MODE SELECT button (or the MEMORY button if an advanced process panel is
installed) while applying power to the machine. Rotate the output control knob until the display reads
SPIdIAG. Release the MODE SELECT button.
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Test
Steps
Return to Section TOC
F-92
Required Action
Expected Results
Lft.display Rt. display
1
Adjust the output control potentiometer to its highest
setting (completely clockwise).
oCP
HI
2
Adjust the output control potentiometer to its lowest
setting (completely counterclockwise).
oCP
Lo
NOTE: If a standard Mode Select Panel is not installed in the machine, skip steps 3-12
3
HI
HSP
Adjust the hot start potentiometer to its highest setting.
4
Lo
HSP
Adjust the hot start potentiometer to its lowest setting.
5
HI
ACP
Adjust the arc control potentiometer to its highest setting.
6
Lo
ACP
Adjust the arc control potentiometer to its lowest setting.
7
1
NodE
All weld mode indicator LEDs should be off. Press the
weld mode select push button to select the first weld
mode. Only the top weld mode indicator LED should be
on, all others should be off.
8
2
NodE
Press the weld mode select push button again to select
the second weld mode. Only the second weld mode
indicator LED should be on, all others should be off.
9
Press the weld mode select push button again to select
3
NodE
the third weld mode. Only the third weld mode indicator
LED should be on, all others should be off.
4
Press the weld mode select push button again to select
NodE
10
the fourth weld mode. Only the fourth weld mode indicator LED should be on, all others should be off.
5
NodE
Press the weld mode select push button again to select
11
the fifth weld mode. Only the bottom weld mode indicator LED should be on, all others should be off.
Press the weld mode select push button again and veri12
NodE
CLr
fy that all weld mode indicator LEDs are off.
The test will automatically advance to step 25
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-93
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR
RETEST AFTER REPAIR
Expected Results
Lft.display Rt. display
NOTE: If an Advanced Process Panel is not installed in the machine, skip steps 13-24
=100
LEnc
13
Turn the Advanced Process Panel left encoder clockwise
until the value displayed on the Advanced Process Panel
lower left display equals 100. Note that this should require
exactly one revolution of the encoder knob.
Test
Steps
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Required Action
Turn the Advanced Process Panel left encoder counterclockwise until the value displayed on the Advanced
Process Panel lower left display equals zero. Note that
this should require exactly one revolution of the encoder
knob.
Turn the Advanced Process Panel right encoder clockwise
until the value displayed on the Advanced Process Panel
lower left display equals 100. Note that this should require
exactly one revolution of the encoder knob.
LEnc
=0
rEnc
=100
16
Turn the Advanced Process Panel right encoder counterclockwise until the value displayed on the Advanced
Process Panel lower left display equals zero. Note that
this should require exactly one revolution of the encoder
knob.
rEnc
=0
17
Press and hold the Advanced Process Panel Memory button until the right display changes to on.
EorY
oFF
18
Release the Advanced Process Panel Memory button.
EorY
on
19
Press and hold the Advanced Process Panel Select button.
rSEL
oFF
20
Release the Advanced Process Panel Select button.
rSEL
on
21
Verify that the Advanced Process Panel upper left display
contains the following pattern and that the brightness of
the characters is uniform:
“0123456789ABCDEF”
Press and release the Advanced Process Panel Memory
button to advance to the next step.
dISP
1
22
Verify that the Advanced Process Panel lower left display
contains the following pattern and that the brightness of
the characters is uniform:
“0123456789ABCDEF”
Press and release the Advanced Process Panel Memory
button to advance to the next step.
dISP
2
14
Return to Section TOC
F-93
15
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-94
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR
RETEST AFTER REPAIR
Test
Steps
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Required Action
Expected Results
Lft.display Rt. display
23
Verify that the Advanced Process Panel upper right display contains the following pattern and that the brightness of the characters is uniform:
“0123456789ABCDEF”
Press and release the Advanced Process Panel
Memory button to advance to the next step.
dISP
3
24
Verify that the Advanced Process Panel lower right display contains the following pattern and that the brightness of the characters is uniform:
“0123456789ABCDEF”
Press and release the Advanced Process Panel
Memory button to advance to the next step.
dISP
4
25
The weld terminals “ON” and “REMOTE” LEDs should
both be off. Press the weld terminals push button to
select weld terminals (studs) “ON” and verify that the
weld terminals “ON” LED turns on.
SudS
on
26
Press the weld terminals push button again to select
weld terminals “REMOTE” and verify that the weld terminals “ON” LED turns off and that the weld terminals
“REMOTE” LED turns on.
Press the weld terminals push button again and verify
that both of the weld terminals LEDs are off.
The “LOCAL” and “REMOTE” workpoint source LEDs
should both be off. Press the workpoint source push
button to select “LOCAL” and verify that the workpoint
source “LOCAL” LED turns on and that the “REMOTE”
workpoint source LED remains off.
SudS
rE
SudS
cLr
LorE
LocL
29
Press the workpoint source pushbutton again to select
workpoint source “REMOTE” and verify that the workpoint source “LOCAL” LED turns off and the workpoint
source “REMOTE” workpoint source LED turns on.
LorE
rE
30
Press the workpoint source pushbutton again and verify
that both workpoint source LEDs are off.
LorE
cLr
31
This will only appear if a potentiometer is already connected to the 6-pin amphenol connector on the front of
the machine. If this message appears, disconnect the
potentiometer from the 6-pin amphenol connector.
dcon
6-PIn roCP
32
Connect a remote output control potentiometer to the 6pin amphenol connector on the front of the machine.
con
6-PIn roCP
27
Return to Section TOC
F-94
28
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-95
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR
RETEST AFTER REPAIR
Test
Steps
Return to Master TOC
Required Action
Expected Results
Lft.display Rt. display
33
Adjust the remote output control potentiometer connect- 6-PIn roCP
ed to the 6-pin amphenol connector to its highest setting.
HI
34
Adjust the remote output control potentiometer connect- 6-PIn roCP
ed to the 6-pin amphenol connector to its lowest setting.
Lo
35
This will only appear if a trigger switch is already con6-PIn rIgr
nected to the 6-pin amphenol connector on the front of
the machine and the trigger switch is presently on.
Turn the trigger switch connected to the 6-pin amphenol
connector off.
oFF
36
Turn the trigger switch connected to the 6-pin amphenol 6-PIn Rigr
connector on.
Turn the trigger switch connected to the 6-pin amphenol 6-PIn rLgr
connector off.
on
37
oFF
38
This will only appear if a potentiometer is still connected to the 6-pin amphenol connector. If this message
appears, disconnect the potentiometer from the 6-pin
amphenol connector.
dcon
6-PIn roCP
39
This will only appear if a potentiometer is already connected to the 14-pin amphenol connector. If this message appears, disconnect the potentiometer from the
14-pin amphenol connector.
dcon
14-PIn roCP
40
Connect a remote output control potentiometer to the
14-pin amphenol connector.
con
14-PIn roCP
41
Adjust the remote output control potentiometer connect- 14-PIn roCP
ed to the 14-pin amphenol connector to its highest setting.
Adjust the remote output control potentiometer connect- 14-PIn roCP
ed to the 14-pin amphenol connector to its lowest setting.
42
43
Return to Section TOC
F-95
44
45
This will only appear if a trigger switch is already connected to the 14-pin amphenol connector and the trigger switch is presently on. Turn the trigger switch connected to the 14-pin amphenol connector off.
Turn the trigger switch connected to the 14-pin amphenol connector on.
Turn the trigger switch connected to the 14-pin amphenol connector off.
V350-PRO
HI
Lo
14-PIn rIgr
oFF
14-PIn rIgr
on
14-PIn rIgr
oFF
Return to Master TOC
RETEST AFTER REPAIR
Test
Steps
46
This will only appear if a potentiometer is still connected to the 14-pin amphenol connector. If this message
appears, disconnect the potentiometer from the 14-pin
amphenol connector.
dcon
14-pIn roCP
47
Test steps 21-24 verify the functionality of the gas solenoid. If an oscilloscope is available, verify that the current flowing through the gas solenoid is zero before the
solenoid is energized, increases to approximately
700mA (pull in current), remains at 700 mA for approximately 150 msec, and decreases to approximately
200mA (hold current). Press the local/remote pushbutton to turn the gas solenoid on.
GAS
On
GAS
OFF
< - 150msec - >
700mA
+------------------------+
+-----....------+
Return to Master TOC
0mA- - - - +
Return to Section TOC
Expected Results
Lft.display Rt. display
Required Action
200mA
+-------------
Or, the signal can be verified by measuring 12.3 VDC
+/- .5V from lead 553A to 554A (Lead 553A should be
positive)
48
Press the local/remote pushbutton again to turn the gas
solenoid off.
After completing all of the above tests, the following will appear on the display.
Return to Master TOC
Verify this message appears for approximately 3 seconds
Return to Section TOC
F-96
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
F-96
V350-PRO
DIAg
PASS
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
G-1
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
G-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
-ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS SECTIONELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION G
WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
MACHINE SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
CONTROL PC BOARD SCHEMATIC #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4
CONTROL PC BOARD SCHEMATIC #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5
CONTROL PC BOARD SCHEMATIC #3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6
CONTROL PC BOARD SCHEMATIC #4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7
CONTROL PC BOARD ASSEMBLY (L11088-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *
POWER SUPPLY PC BOARD SCHEMATIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-8
POWER SUPPLY PC BOARD ASSEMBLY (G3632-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *
SWITCH PC BOARD SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-9
SWITCH PC BOARD ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-10
DISPLAY PC BOARD SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-11
DISPLAY PC BOARD ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-12
LED SELECT PC BOARD SCHEMATIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-13
LED SELECT PC BOARD ASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-14
LED POTENTIOMETER PC BOARD SCHEMATIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-15
LED POTENTIOMETER PC BOARD ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-16
SPI REMOTE PC BOARD SCHEMATIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-17
SPI REMOTE PC BOARD ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-18
SNUBBER PC BOARD SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-19
SNUBBER PC BOARD ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-20
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
* NOTE: Many PC Board Assemblies are now totally encapsulated and are therefore considered to be unserviceable. The Assembly numbers are provided on this page but the actual drawings are no longer included.
V350-PRO
WIRING DIAGRAM INVERTEC V350
RIGHT SIDE OF MACHINE
C1,C3
440460V
550575V
H6
H5
H2
200208V
207A
220230V
207
F
H3
MAIN
TRANSFORMER
AUXILIARY
TRANSFORMER
TP1
B
TP2
C
H1
X2
X4
OUTPUT
RECTIFIER
605
610
612
611
602
65
66B
~
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
8
16
7
15
6
14
5
13
J6
R
E
M
O
T
E
J1
5 13
3213
4 12
3212
3 11
3211
2 10
J332
1
9
6
12
5
11
3215
4 10
3
9
2
8
1
7
553
SNB
4
75
76
554
553
2
77
J61
4
12
554
3
11
553
10
405 406
403
2
3
1
2
1
4
5
6
3
4
7
3
8
9 10 11 12
J43
J41
4
5
8
7
6
2
1
251
ADVANCED
PROCESS
254
253
1 14
SPI FLEX CIRCUIT
253
2
4
1
3
J2
J5
3
1
4
2
J3
J4
12 11 10
9
8
7
10
9
8
7
6
6
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
('CE' Model will not contain leads 31A or32)
251
254
E
D
A
B
77A
POWER
41A
CB1
41B
21
24
32A
3.5A
CB2
10A
541
532
75A
76A
76
_
6
D M G
E F
4A
32
42
J
B K I
41B
2A C L N H
C 75A
77A
41
32 31A
A
2 2A
SPI FLEX CIRCUIT
(REAR VIEW)
GND
(REAR VIEW )
4
WIRE FEEDER REMOTE
31
31A
31B
6 PIN
REMOTE
401
402
2
J34
9
GND F
66 65
13 25
OR
75
1
J42
MODE
2 10
77
407 410
412 411 408
9
76A
21
S1
903A
903
901A
903B
+
COLOR CODE:
B = BLACK
G = GREEN
R = RED
W = WHITE
U = BLUE
N = BROWN
Y = YELLOW
S
N
U
B
B
E
R
3
SPI FLEX CIRCUIT
20
40
10
3202
54
GAS
SOLENOID
275
276
3201
IN PARENTHESIS
COLORS FOR
"CE" MACHINES
G(G/Y)
901B
W(N)
W
R(B)
V
B(U)
U
C
B
A
R1
TP4
TP5
NOTES:
N.A. 1. FOR MACHINES WITH RED, BLACK AND WHITE POWER CORDS
FOR SINGLE PHASE INPUT: CONNECT GREEN LEAD TO GROUND PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE.
CONNECT BLACK AND WHITE LEADS TO SUPPLY CIRCUIT.
WRAP RED LEAD WITH TAPE TO PROVIDE 600V. INSULATION.
FOR THREE PHASE INPUT: CONNECT GREEN LEAD TO GROUND PER NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE.
CONNECT BLACK, RED & WHITE LEADS TO SUPPLY CIRCUIT.
2. FOR MACHINES WITH BROWN, BLACK AND BLUE POWER CORDS
FOR SINGLE PHASE INPUT: CONNECT GREEN/YELLOW LEAD TO GROUND PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE.
CONNECT BLUE AND BROWN LEADS TO SUPPLY CIRCUIT.
WRAP BLACK LEAD WITH TAPE TO PROVIDE 600V. INSULATION.
FOR THREE PHASE INPUT: CONNECT GREEN/YELLOW GROUND PER NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE.
CONNECT BLUE, BLACK & BROWN LEADS TO SUPPLY CIRCUIT.
J90
FRONT VIEW OF MACHINE
1 234
LEGEND
ALL MACHINES
OPTION
COMPONENT OUTLINE
901
802
804
801
806
+
4
277
3204
3203
65B
554
4
OUTPUT 5
CONTROL
1
3205
4A
J331
R5
10K/2W
2
6
J7
15
3216
7
16
3206
2
6 14
3207
3313
3316
3314
3305
1
2
3
1
7 15
J60B
8
8 16
5
J60A
5
4 WELD
3 TERMINALS
3304
3312
3315
3303
3
6
3301
9
9
DISPLAY
4
1
2
CONTROL RECTIFIER
66
2 10
1
1
502
503
~
3 11
J33
J61
5
4 12
10
6
5
1
15
2
3204
3203
3206
3205
2
J37
3314
3313
3304
3312
3303
14
608
616
607
615
609
CURRENT
TRANSDUCER
Return to Master TOC
505
506
503
TP3
C
5 13
J333
30
L2
REACTOR
41A
or
541A
(construction)
7
3315
277
3305
13
30
10
X4 40
2
J8
20
CHOKE
10
B
7
L1
REACTOR
N.E.
A
A
X3
X1
T
OS
BO
J9
406
412
405
411
380415V
+
_
E
_
D
T
OS
BO
7
C
SE
8
3
715
X2
+
209
A
C
SE
PR
I-IN
24V
28V
42V
COM2
COM1
A
4
716
+
INPUT
BRIDGE
A
3.5A
PR
I-IN
PR
I-O
UT
208
H2
H3
H4
H5
H6
115V
CB3
3
204
202
A
802
806
801
B
2
1 11 5 14 7 16
( 380-575VAC POSITION )
804
6
PR
I-O
UT
532
31
42
54
24
541
FAN
532A
31C
54
541A
J52
All
Other
Models
COM2A
206
H4
Return to Master TOC
32A
FAN
31B
FAN
207A
H1
REAR OF MACHINE
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
OR
J52
(Construction)
N.C.
Return to Section TOC
+C2,C4
FANFAN
203
201
205
505
-
PRIMARY
RECONNECT
4
1
J10A J10B
xxxxxxx
Pin 3 lead 31B or 31C
Pin 2 lead 32A or 532A
207
5
1
1
275
12
3200/300
202
xxxxxxx
4
3
502
2
901
6
6 14
9
5
201
204
2
3
7 15
8
11
1
J22
1
903
9
3
8
6
4
10
2
1002 1020
1001 1010
7
7
3316
6
N.D.
8
3
8 16
5
J21
4
4
10
4
209
5
3201
3202
3207
3212
3213
3216
3215
3
NOTE:
IF ADVANCED PROCESS PANEL IS NOT INSTALLED
SPI FLEX CIRCUIT IS PLUGGED INTO J33.
276
1010
1020
610
605
608
616
1001
1002
3
2
7
208
2
6
8
205
1
402
408
401
407
5
203
3200/300
1
206
SWITCH
J20
410
403
INPUT
PER
N.A.
+
Return to Master TOC
WIRING DIAGRAM - INVERTEC V350-PRO
607
615
716
715
611
612
609
602
Return to Section TOC
G-2
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
}
Return to Section TOC
G-2
N.D. INPUT POWER LINE FILTER IS PRESENT ONLY
ON "CE" MODELS.
LEFT SIDE OF MACHINE
N.B. SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY OF A PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD MAY CHANGE WITHOUT AFFECTING
THE INTERCHANGEABILITY OF A COMPLETE BOARD, THIS DIAGRAM MAY NOT SHOW THE EXACT
COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY HAVING A COMMON CODE NUMBER.
N.C. PLACE "A" LEAD ON APPROPRIATE CONNECTION FOR INPUT VOLTAGE.
J1,J6,J7, P52,
CONNECTION SHOWN IS FOR 550-575V OPERATION. (CE MODELS ONLY GO TO 440VAC.)
J332, J333
1
TOP CENTER
PANEL
FAN SHROUD CASE FRONT BASE
PROTECTIVE BONDING CIRCUIT
9
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537
N.E. ON "CE" MODELS, MOV's ARE IN THE INPUT POWER
LINE FILTER.
J2,J5,J11,
J22, J41,
J311, P55 J9, J42, P53
J31,J33,
J34,J37
8
16
1
6
5
1
10
3
2
4
1
4
J8,
J20,J21
3
1
4
6
5
8
J4
J43, J331
1
7
J60
J10A,
J10B
6
12
1
1
5
J61
2
15
1
CONNECTOR CAVITY NUMBERING SEQUENCE
(VIEWED FROM COMPONENT SIDE OF BOARD)
1-25-2002
G4082
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual. The wiring diagram specific to your code is pasted inside one of the enclosure panels of your machine.
V350-PRO
CR1
B-OUT
S
J21-7
24V
J52-7
J52-14 28V
J52-5 42V
24
54
42
541 J52-16
COM1
115V
J52-1
532
COM2
J52-11
31
715
6A
615
POWER
BOARD
65B
41A
4 76
76A
2 77 553 4A 75 554
M
L
76
E
E
B
D
2
77A
D
C
A
4
+5 SPI (b)
SPI
+15 SPI (b)
POWER
SUPPLY SPI GND (b)
+5 RS232 (e)
RS232
GND (e)
SUPPLY
65
75A
4A
2B 2A
6 PIN REMOTE
C
75
WIRE FEEDER REMOTE
+10 Volts
AMPHENOLS ARE VIEWED FROM FRONT OF MACHINE
554
GAS SOLENOID
+
Return to Master TOC
J42-5
J42-2
J5-3
J5-2
605
610
1010
1020
611
612
615
607
715
716
J6-5
J6-10
J10B-1
J10B-2
J6-11
J6-12
J6-15
J6-7
J7-15
J7-16
VOLTAGE / FREQUENCY CONVERTER #2 (+)
VOLTAGE / FREQUENCY CONVERTER #2 (-)
PRIMARY CURRENT SENSE #2 (-)
PRIMARY CURRENT SENSE #2 (+)
GND (a)
SOFT START CONTROL
PULSE TRANSFORMER GATE DRIVE
PULSE TRANSFORMER GATE DRIVE
+ 15 (a)
FAN CONTROL
J4-7
J4-12
J4-8
J4-10
POWERDOWN SIGNAL (HIGH=RUN)
+15V (a)
408
410
407
412
408
410
411
411
J4-11
407
412
403
403
J4-3
+5V SPI (b)
402
401
406
402
401
406
J4-2
+15V SPI (b)
J4-1
J4-6
GND SPI (b)
+5V RS232 (e)
J43-9
405
405
J4-5
GND (e)
553
graphical representation
of potentiometer connection
REMOTE BOARD
J332-16
J332-15
J332-14
J332-13
J332-12
J332-11
J332-7
J332-6
J332-5
J332-4
J332-3
J332-2
J332-1
3303
3315
3312
J60A-2
3304
J60A-4
J60A-1
J43-8
CHOPPER GND (c)
POWER
SUPPLY +20 (d)
GND (d)
J43-7
J43-1
3207
J61-3
3202
J61-2
LED 2
LED 3
3201
J61-1
3216
J61-6
LED 4
LED 5
3215
+15V
R5
REMOTE
10K/2W
+15V
276
277 275
3212
3206
J61-14
3204
J61-12
J61-4
AMPS
5
8
J4, J43, J331
6
1
J61-5
DISPLAY PANEL
J3-10
OR
+15V
13
N.D.
HOT +10V
START
ARC +10V
CONTROL
J61-13
J61-15
3213
MODE PANEL
3215
25
(+)15 VOLT SPI
(+)5 VOLT SPI
/SS
CS1
CS2
CS3
CONNECTOR CAVITY NUMBERING SEQUENCE
(VIEWED FROM COMPONENT SIDE OF BOARD)
LEGEND
ALL MACHINES
OPTION
COMPONENT OUTLINE
N.D.
MISO
SCK
MOSI
GROUND SPI
J2-1
J2-3
J2-4
251
253
254
254
253
ADVANCED PROCESS PANEL
NOTES :
N.A. PC BOARD COMPONENTS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE
ONLY. ALL COMPONENTS ARE NOT SHOWN.
N.B. INPUT POWER LINE FILTER IS PRESENT ONLY
ON "CE" MODELS.
N.C. ON "CE" MODELS, MOV's ARE IN THE INPUT POWER
LINE FILTER.
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537
N.D. THE SPI CIRCUIT PIN ASSIGNMENTS ARE SHOWN AT
THE CONTROL PCB. THIS PIN ASSIGNMENT IS THE SAME
FOR ALL THE SPI CONNECTORS.
251
MODE
SWITCH
+15V
12
OUTPUT CONTROL
+15V
3213
6
2
J3-1
J3-2
J3-3
J3-4
J3-5
J3-6
J3-7
J3-8
J3-9
VOLTS
+10V
+15V
+15V
4
J8,J20, J21
4
1
SPI CIRCUIT
SPI
CIRCUIT
LED 1
4
3
J9,J42,P53
1
3
J43-2
+15V
+15V
J60B-1
+15V
REMOTE
J60B-2
LOCAL
J60B-3
+15V
J60B-4
3313
3316
3314
3305
3216
3215
3213
3212
3211
3207
3206
3205
3204
3203
3202
3201
10
J2,J5,J11,
J22,J41,
J311,P55
2
1
J10A,
J10B
1
SPI CIRCUIT
ON
WELD TERMINALS
6
7
+15V
+15V +15V
J60A-3
16
J31,J33,
1 J34,J37 5
+5V (a)
GND (a)
-15V (a)
J43-3
N.D.
3316
3315
3314
3313
3312
276
275
277
3305
3304
3303
15
9
THERMOSTAT
J43-6
J43-12
J43-4
+20 (c)
SPI CIRCUIT
J333-16
J333-15
J333-14
J333-13
J333-12
J333-8
J333-7
J333-6
J333-5
J333-4
J333-3
J333-2
J333-1
THERMOSTAT
502
THERMAL
B
F
J331-6
J331-5
J331-4
J331-3
J331-2
N
K
A
G
14 PIN'S "4" LEAD
6 PIN'S "4" LEAD
"75" LEAD
6 PIN'S "76" LEAD
SOLENOID COIL (-)
32
J
F
J331-11
J331-10
J331-9
J331-8
I
31
503
J42-4
J42-1
J42-3
5
J1,J6,J7, J332, J333, P52
8
1
N.D.
H
"2" LEAD
"77" LEAD
14 PIN'S "76" LEAD
SOLENOID COIL (+)
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
76A
503
506
POWER DOWN SIGNAL
MACHINE +15 (a)
CONTROL +5 (a)
POWER GND (a)
SUPPLY
-15 (a)
66B
21
J60-A, J60-B
C2/TP2
320V
.05uF 160J
600V
611
J41-2
+40 VDC
66
J41-1
42
(+) STUD VOLTAGE SENSE
(-) STUD VOLTAGE SENSE
1
612
54
77
J9-1
J9-3
NEGATIVE
502
41A
75A
250 Ohms
X2
0
FR-IN
X3
X1
3
506
31B
24
901
903
505
31B
41
CURRENT FEEDBACK ( 4V=500A )
+15V
-15V
CONTROL BOARD COMMON
J61
-
B1
41
32 32A
J8-1
J8-2
J8-4
J8-6
1
505
541
CB1
801
802
804
806
TP3
150V
80J
THERMOSTAT
REACTOR
32A
532
3.5A CB2
R1
S1
POSITIVE
C1/TP1 320V
.05uF 160J
600V
903B
1010
1020
+
901B
SOFT
START
J20-7
J20-1
607
716
FAN
901A
21
MAIN CHOKE 903A
201
J20-3
J20-2
FAN CONTROL
J20-6
(200-208)
(220-230)
(380-415)
(440-460)
(550-575)
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H6
FAN
115 VAC
FAN
(+)
+15
801
802
804
806
CURRENT
TRANSDUCER
SNB
xxxxxxx
J22-4
J22-1
J22-2
FAN POWER
J22-3
Shown connected for
200 - 240 Volt Input Voltage
(-)
B-IN S
PULSE
TRANSFORMER
207
J21-4
J21-8
J20-5
Dashed lines represent
copper bus connections.
CE COLORS IN
PARANTHESYS
610
J21-3
+
4200 uF
2
V/F CONVERTER # 2
3.5A CB3
CONSTRUCTION MODELS DO NOT HAVE CB1, CB2
OR REMOTE, LEAD 532 GOES TO J22 AND LEAD 541
GOES TO THE CONTROL RECTIFIER IN THE
CONSTRUCTION MODEL.
605
S
-
I OUT J90-3
+15V J90-1
-15V J90-2
GND J90-4
BK-IN
A-OUT
+
4200 uF
A
AUXILIARY
TRANSFORMER
X3
0
204
NEG
X1
0
AC1
OUTPUT
DIODES
X4
202
TP1
J6-9
J6-2
J6-16
J6-8
J10A-1
J10A-2
S
208
AC2
A
+15V
MAIN RELAY CONTROL
VOLTAGE / FREQUENCY CONVERTER #1 (+)
VOLTAGE / FREQUENCY CONVERTER #1 (-)
PRIMARY CURRENT SENSE #1 (-)
PRIMARY CURRENT SENSE #1 (+)
609
602
616
608
1001
1002
REACTOR
X2
-
203
J21-2 608
J21-1 1001
J21-5 1002
S
B
4200 uF
POS
AC3
TP3 TP2
J21-6 616
6
V/F CONVERTER # 1
+
H1
C
SNUBBER
BOARD
S
7
-
A-IN
4200 uF
INPUT SWITCH
Return to Master TOC
205
X4
0
206
CONTROL BOARD
602
J20-8
MAIN TRANSFORMER
RECONNECT SWITCH
N.C.
N.B.
609
J20-4
MAIN
CR1
INPUT
RELAY
xxxxxxx
209
GND
Return to Section TOC
+15
SWITCH BOARD
L1
W WHITE
(BROWN)
INPUT
L2
LINES V RED
(BLACK)
L3
U BLACK
(BLUE)
L3
G GREEN
(GREEN/YELLOW)
Return to Section TOC
G-3
Enhanced Diagram
SCHEMATIC - COMPLETE MACHINE
S
Return to Master TOC
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
+
Return to Section TOC
G-3
14
1
J61-7
B
G4093
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
G-4
SCHEMATIC - DIGITAL CONTROL PC BOARD #1
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
G-4
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
G-5
SCHEMATIC - DIGITAL CONTROL PC BOARD #2
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
G-5
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
G-6
SCHEMATIC - DIGITAL CONTROL PC BOARD #3
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
G-6
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
G-7
SCHEMATIC - DIGITAL CONTROL PC BOARD #4
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
G-7
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.
V350-PRO
SCHEMATIC - POWER SUPPLY PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
R50
D18
10
11
VCC
OUT
6
8
VREF
VFB
2
4
RT/CT
COMP 1
5
GND
CS
J41
3
R15
R16
1
R10
R5
100K
100K
5
J42
D19
3A
600V
IN
X8
OCI1
1
OUT
CNY17-3
2
6
4
Vfb1
ADJ
OV1
C11
22
35V
T1
475
C14
0.1
50V
C47
1.0
35V
1.21K
.33W
R52
1.82K
221K
R14
D21
1.0A
30V
R46
6.19K
7
T1
4
6
C7
0.1
50V
C6
4.7
35V
C8
820p
50V
R39
R12
56.2K
5.62K
C45
150p
100V
3W
0.05
C32
10p
100V
J41
R11
Return to Master TOC
.750 Amp
D24
9
R55
Machine Control
Shut Down
Capacitor
+15Volts
Q1
21A
200V
DZ8
18V
3W
Vfb1
R3
+t
S
10.0
X5
4
Vref 1
12
D
R51
D3
1A
600V
2
33.2
44.2K
R60
R8
J41
DC Input (+)
7
Vref 1
33.2
332
10.0
R61
C13
1
200V
C39
0.1
50V
3
R9
D22
1.0A
30V
C41
100
16V
43.2K
10.0K
+5Volts, .750 Amp
C43
100
16V
T1
R49
10.0K
R27
R2
T1
10.0K
+t
.13
60V
LED2
C12
.0015
2000V
10-55 VDC
Operation
J42
3
6A
200V
R53
R6
R7
2
47.5
47.5
R57
R58
47.5
47.5
1
D4
6A
200V
G
C42
R13
2700p
50V
10.0K
3
1
J41
5
C44
0.1
50V
C40
1.0
35V
8
DZ1
24V
3W
R36
30.1
30.1
R35
IN
OCI2
2
G
2
RT/CT
COMP 1
221K
5
R1
C26
1
200V
150p
100V
GND
Overvoltage
Shutdown
3
D20
1.0A
30V
Vfb2
75K
C53
.1
OV2
C4
820p
50V
S
R31
X4
C2
0.1
50V
C3
4.7
35V
CS
R32
15.0
R29
Q2
21A
200V
J43
DZ7
18V
3W
3
R38
R28
56.2K
5.62K
1.21K
.33W
15Volts, .250Amps
SPI
C28
10p
100V
249
3W
0.05
J43
R40
3
+t
.13
60V
D16
16A
200V
LED1
2
+5Volts, 3 Amps
150
.33W
150
.33W
SPI
Vref 2
332
C33
4.7
35V
J43
D15
X7
5
IN
OUT
1A
600V
C1
4.7
35V
T2
1
GND
C5
0.1
50V
C30
1.0
35V
R44
4
15
150
.33W
+5Volts, .100 Amp
OCI3
CNY17-3
8
CAN
11
6
+t
D7
1A
600V
C17
4.7
35V
9
C18
4.7
35V
C21
0.1
50V
R19
10
T2
2
.24
2.49K
.33W
R21
2
X6
4
10
OUT
7
C29
1.0
35V
R20
.24
+5Volts, .100 Amp
150
.33W
8
RS232
C20
4.7
35V
C19
4.7
35V
C22
0.1
50V
R23
C10
4.7
35V
T2
C16
R22
2700p
50V
10.0K
+t
D6
1A
600V
GND
R25
T2
1.82K
7
J43
D1
IN
Vfb2
475K
C46
150p
100V
J43
R24
C9
0.1
50V
4
J43
D12
1A
600V
6
+20Volts
.200 Amps
Gate Drive
J43
5
5
J43
R17
R42
13
150
.33W
44.2K
C34
0.1
50V
R18
C35
100
16V
43.2K
D13
C36
100
16V
R43
C37
100
16V
R63
D17
T2
Return to Master TOC
C23
1.0
35V
C25
0.1
50V
C24
4.7
35V
12
OV1
DZ4
3.3V
3W
6
OUT
ADJ
T2
> 55 VDC
D14
D9
1A
600V
100K
C52
150p
X3
IN
R30
6
VFB
R33
R45
gnd_mcps
OUT
VREF
4
C27
DZ3
27V
.5W
VCC
8
15.0K
R56
R34
7
R62
6
Vref 2
C49
.022
D10
D
4
DZ2
27V
.5W
5.62K
D25
1
CNY17-3
J42
6
C31
.0015
2000V
D23
1.0A
30V
4
J42
gnd_mcps
R37
D2
1A
600V
5
J42
2
D8
1A
600V
R41
R26
Operation
30-55 VDC
1.00K
1
6
J42
OUT
X9
14
+5V
5
1.21K
.33W
-15Volts, .100Amp
ADJ
T2
Undervoltage
Detect
<30VDC
R48
C38
4.7
35V
T1
OV2
8
X1
TL431 REF
GND
1
R64
DC Input (-)
10.0K
Return to Section TOC
+5V
Machine Control Power Supply
10.0
Return to Section TOC
G-8
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
R4
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
G-8
2.49K
.33W
1
+20Volts
.200 Amps
Gate Drive
8
X2
TL431 REF
6
J43
11
J43
J43
9
J43
1
12
LAST NO. USED
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537
MFD ( .022/50V
CAPACITORS =
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
RESISTORS = Ohms (
1/4W UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
1A, 400V
DIODES =
(UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
NOTES :
N.A. SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON A PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD MAY CHANGE
WITHOUT AFFECTING THE INTERCHANGEABILITY OF A COMPLETE BOARD, THIS DIAGRAM MAY
NOT SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS HAVING A COMMON CODE
NUMBER.
RC-
LABELS
D-
SUPPLY
VOLTAGE NET
POWER SUPPLY SOURCE POINT
COMMON CONNECTION
FRAME CONNECTION
EARTH GROUND CONNECTION
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE
MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE PER E2056
ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS ± .02
ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS ± .002
ON ALL ANGLES IS ± .5 OF A DEGREE
MATERIAL TOLERANCE (" t ") TO AGREE
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS.
DO NOT SCALE THIS DRAWING
"X" INFO.
Chg. Sheet No.
6-2-2000A
10-27-2000E
DESIGN INFORMATION
REFERENCE:
DRAWN BY: JP\TK
ENGINEER:
APPROVED:
SUPERSEDING:
EQUIPMENT TYPE:
SUBJECT:
SCALE: NONE
Digital Systems
Schematic, Digital Power Supply
DATE: 11-30-98 DRAWING No.:
G 3631
SOLID EDGE
THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY, CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.
EN-170
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
FILENAME: G3631-2D2
GENERAL INFORMATION
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
G-9
SCHEMATIC - SWITCH PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
G-9
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.
V350-PRO
G-10
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
PC BOARD ASSEMBLY-SWITCH
ITEM
REQ'D
N.E., N.F.
G3830-1
V350
SWITCH
R2
R1
S20500-4
CAPACITOR,PPMF,.0047,1000V,BOX
C2,C24
2
S20500-7
CAPACITOR,PPMF,.047,1600V,BOX,10%
C3,C18
2
S13490-93
CAPACITOR,TAEL,27,35V,10%
C4,C21
2
S20500-1
CAPACITOR,PPMF,0.1,1000V,10%,BOX
C5,C6,C15,C16
4
S16668-6
CAPACITOR,CEMO,4700p,50V,10%
C7,C12,C13,C14,C20,C27,C28
8
S16668-5
CAPACITOR,CEMO,.022, 50V,20%
C8,C9,C22
3
S16668-9
CAPACITOR,CEMO,150p, 100V,5%
C10,C11
2
S13490-85
CAPACITOR,PCF,.027,50V,5%
C25,C26
2
T11577-57
CAPACITOR,PEF,0.1,400V,10%
C31,C32
2
S16668-7
CAPACITOR,CEMO,820p,50V,5%
CR1,CR2
2
S14293-18
J21
R126
R127
RELAY,DPST,12VDC,AG-CDO
D1,D4,D16,D17
4
T12705-59
6
DIODE,AXLDS,3A,600V,UFR
D7,D8,D9,D12,D14,D18,D19
9
T12199-1
7
DIODE,AXLDS,1A,400V
D20,D21
DZ1,DZ2,DZ3,DZ5,DZ6,DZ15
B201
R98
1
DZ17
C12
R86
N.C.
ZENER DIODE, 1W,18V,5% 1N4746A
DZ11,DZ22
2
T12702-4
ZENER DIODE, 1W,20V,5% 1N4747A
J20,J21
2
S24016-8
CONNECTOR,MOLEX,MINI,PCB,RT-L,8-PIN
J22
1
S24016-4
CONNECTOR,MOLEX,MINI,PCB,RT-L,4-PIN
OCI1,OCI2,OCI3
3
S15000-22
OPTOCOUPLER,PHOTO-Q,70V,CNY17-3/VDE
OCI4
1
S15000-29
OPTOCOUPLER,TRIAC,DRV,RANDOM,600V
N.A. Q1
1
T12704-75
TRANSISTOR,NMF,T247,4A,900V(SS)
N.A. Q2,Q3,Q4,Q5
4
T12704-73
MOSFET,4-PIN DIP,1A,100V,RFD110(SS)
T14648-5
RESISTOR,WW,5W,3.3K,5%,SQ
R87
R59
R45
T12702-45
R1,R2,R3,R4,R7,R8,R9,R10
Q3
C21
R131,R132,R133
R81
R80
R66
D20
C7
R51
R34
R5,R6,R19,R26,R93,R105
DZ23
R49
R48
R50
R33
2
C2
R129
C24
A1
R68
C11
D14
A2
X3
R46
R47
R134
R32
R82
B216
R53
B205
B204
DZ12
D12
DZ18
DZ19
3
D17
R106
R100
DZ20
Q1
DZ5
DZ6
20
R105
C16
N.B., N.G., N.J.
(5 PLACES)
B202
PART NO.
R36
C8
R132
R56
DZ8
N.N.
Return to Master TOC
B209
T1
R138
R137
OCI1
R140
R139
CR2
CR1
C25
OCI4
C27
R141
D18
R109
D19
D7
C26
0
9.00 ±.04
N.K.
2
N.M.
Return to Master TOC
TP1
R58
J22
0
2
S19400-1652
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,16.5K,1%
12
S19400-10R0
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,10.0,1%
16
S19400-1003
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,100K,1%
R35,R52,R73,R84
4
S19400-6191
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,6.19K,1%
R36,R37,R123
3
S19400-2213
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,221K,1%
12
S19400-1002
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,10.0K,1%
R41,R67
2
S19400-4752
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,47.5K ,1%
R44,R68
2
T12300-79
RESISTOR,WW, 1W,1.0,1%
R46,R76
2
S19400-3322
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,33.2K,1%
R47,R64
2
S19400-2000
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,200,1%
R55,R56,R57,R58
4
S24376-3
RESISTOR,WW,10W,100,5%
R61,R77
2
S19400-8251
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,8.25K,1%
R65,R120
2
S19400-2001
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,2.00K,1%
R78,R79
2
S16296-5
TRIMMER,MT,1/2W,10K, 10%,LINEAR
R83,R122,R141
3
S19400-1000
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,100,1%
R137
1
S19400-3570
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,357,1%
R138
1
S19400-1500
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,150,1%
R139
1
S19400-4750
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,475,1%
R140
1
S19400-39R2
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,39.2,1%
T1
1
S13000-46
TRANSFORMER,PCB;
TP1
1
T13640-24
MOV,175VRMS,120J,20MM
TRI1
1
S15161-27
TRIAC,T220,8A,800V
X1,X4
2
S15128-10
VOLTAGE REF,ADJ, PRECISION,431I
X2,X3
2
S15128-18
OP-AMP,QUAD, HIGH-PERF,33074
R38,R40,R42,R45,R53,R59
R57
R55
R31
R12
R11
J20
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,3.32K,1%
R14,R107
R66,R69,R70,R72,R80,R82
R131
TRI1
N.H.
S19400-3321
R86,R87,R134,R135
IDENTIFICATION CODE
R30
R9
R10
6
R51,R62,R63,R74,R75,R85
G3830-1DO
R101
R133
R7
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,150K,1%
R13,R39,R43,R60,R81,R92
R97,R98,R99,R100,R101,R106
R130
R8
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,1.00K,1%
S19400-1503
R32,R33,R34,R48,R49,R50
R142
R27
B206
20
S19400-1001
5
R15,R20,R21,R22,R27,R28
MANUFACTURED AS:
B212
R69
R70
DZ13
DZ7
D4
R28
R26
C6
R67
C28
R61
R79
R22
20
Q5
Q4
R52
9
R11,R12,R30,R31,R142
R109,R128,R129
R128
DZ1
R6
16
R124,R125,R126,R127,R130
N.D.
C23
C13
C20
R5
1
4
B217
D16
C31
R35
R60
ZENER DIODE, 1W,12V,5% 1N4742A
DZ9,DZ10,DZ12,DZ13
B211
R97
DZ10
D1
C1
T12702-19
N.L.
R93
C15
DZ16
DZ15
R78
1
NON-COMPONENT
SIDE
Q2
R44
C10
DZ2
DZ3
D9
ZENER DIODE, 1W,6.2V,5% 1N4735A
DZ8
EYELET DETAIL
R99
DZ9
ZENER DIODE, 1W,15V,5% 1N4744A
T12702-40
B207
R41
R43
R20
B218
R85
C29
R77
R75
R63
R21
DZ4
R19
C5
D8
R40
R42
R15
N.L.
B213
C14
R84
R62
R76
R64
R74
R73
R120
Return to Master TOC
R72
C32
R39
R38
C4
Return to Section TOC
OCI2
R135
X2
B208
B203
2
R65
C18
T12702-29
4
DZ16,DZ18,DZ19,DZ23
MAX.
.105
CRIMP
HEIGHT
R125
T2
T3
R4
5
X4
OCI3
C3
10
DZ4,DZ7,DZ17,DZ20
.275
.285
R .045
R124
DZ11
R37
C9
R92
R107
R14
R13
R3
X1
R83
R123
C22
1
R122
DZ22
D21
Return to Section TOC
DESCRIPTION
2
C29
11.00 ±.04
Return to Section TOC
PART NO.
C1,C23
NOTES:
N.A. CAUTION: THIS DEVICE IS SUBJECT TO DAMAGE BY
STATIC ELECTRICITY. LINCOLN ELECTRIC TO SEE E2454
BEFORE HANDLING.
N.B. SNAP POWER TERMINALS INTO COMPONENT SIDE OF BOARD.
N.C. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, THESE AREAS TO BE COVERED ON
BOTH SIDES OF BOARD (WHERE POSSIBLE) WITH SEALANT PRIOR TO
E NCAPSULATION.
N.D. INJECT SEALANT ITEM 8 THROUGH THE PC BOARD HOLES (16 HOLES)
TO SEAL MODULE LEADS. CAVITY BETWEEN BOARD AND MODULE TO BE
COMPLETELY FILLED WITH ITEM 8 SEALANT MATERIAL AS PER
APPROPRIATE MANUFACTURING WORK INSTRUCTIONS. COVER ALL
MODULE LEADS THAT PROTRUDE FROM THE NON-MODULE SIDE OF THE
BOARD WITH ITEM 8 SEALANT.
N.E. FEMALE EYELET TO BE AGAINST THE NON-COMPONENT SIDE AS SHOWN
EYELET MUST NOT SPIN AFTER CLINCHING.
N.F. SOLDER EYELET SO THAT SOLDER COVERS ENTIRE EYELET
AND ALL AROUND EYELET ON COPPER SIDE ONLY.
NO ICICLES OR SOLDER BLOBS PERMITTED.
N.G. AFTER SOLDERING, INSPECT POWER TERMINAL CONNECTIONS PER E1880.
N.H. THIS AREA TO BE COVERED ON COMPONENT SIDE OF BOARD WITH SEALANT
PRIOR TO ENCAPSULATION. MATERIAL MUST BE APPLIED FROM TOP TO
COMPLETELY FILL TO UNDERSIDE OF DEVICE. THEN APPLY SEALANT AROUND
BASE OF DEVICE.
N.J. THIS AREA TO BE COVERED ON OPPOSITE COMPONENT SIDE OF BOARD WITH
ITEM 8 PRIOR TO ENCAPSULATION. DO NOT COAT WITH ENCAPSULATION
MATERIAL ON THE TOP SURFACES NOR THE THREADS.
N.K. SEALANT HEIGHT BETWEEN MODULES NOT TO EXCEED .17” MAX.
N.L. ITEM 5 MUST HAVE FULL CONTACT WITH ITEM 3 ON THE CONTACT SURFACE.
N.M. THE TWO MODULES, ITEM 2 MUST BE MATCHED. THE LAST TWO DIGITS OF THEIR
SORT CODES MUST BE IDENTICAL.
N.N. SMALL PC BOARD HOLES TO BE FREE OF ENCAPSULATION MATERIAL FOR A
CEN TERED .40 MINIMUM DIAMETER AND .45 MAXIMUM DIAMETER (4 HOLES). TO BE
CENTERED WITHIN .06 (DO NOT GET ON MATING SURFACES). MASK PER
APPROPRIATE MANUFACTURING WORK INSTRUCTIONS.
N.P. ELECTRONIC MODULES TO BE ASSEMBLED AND ENCAPSULATED PER E3875.
PC. BOARD BLANK REFERENCE INFORMATION
BUY COMPLETE AS G3831-D (4 LAYER BOARD PER E3281)
(MAKES 2 BOARDS PER PANEL, SEE ELECTRONIC FILE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION)
PANEL SIZE PER E1911
N.A.,N.M.,N.P.
CAPACITORS = MFD/VOLTS
INDUCTANCE = HENRIES
RESISTOR = OHMS
ITEM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PART NO.
SEE DETAIL
M16100-44
S23006
M19612
S24866
T9147-11
T9147-15
E2861
DESCRIPTION
P.C. BOARD BLANK
ELECTRONIC MODULE (A1, A2)
TERMINAL (B211,B218,B204,B205,B209)
CURRENT TRANSDUCER (T2, T3)
POWER TERMINAL (B201, B208)
EYELET-FEMALE
EYELET-MALE
SEALANT
QTY
1
2
5
2
2
8
8
5.0oz
SCHEMATIC REFERENCE L11487-1D0
MAKE PER E1911
ENCAPSULATE WITH E1844, 3 COATS
TEST PER E3817-SW
FOR PARTS ORDERS AND SUBSIDIARY ORDERS:
INCLUDE (1) S25191PRINT AND (1) T12837-1.
THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY, CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE
MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE PER E2056
6-2-2000A
ON ALL ANGLES IS ± .5 OF A DEGREE
MATERIAL TOLERANCE (" t ") TO AGREE
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS.
9-22-2000A
DO NOT SCALE THIS DRAWING
NOTE:
Chg. Sheet No.
ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS ± .02
ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS ± .002
10-27-2000F
5-25-2001C
"X" INFO.
DESIGN INFORMATION
REFERENCE:
DRAWN BY: F.V./JB
ENGINEER:
APPROVED:
SUPERSEDING:
EQUIPMENT TYPE:
SUBJECT:
SCALE: FULL
INVERTER WELDERS
SWITCH P.C. BOARD ASSEMBLY
DATE: 11-18-99 DRAWING No.:
G 3830-1
Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the
machine.
SOLID EDGE
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
G-10
V350-PRO
2
X1
HC14AD
10
12
11
8
1.00K
0.1W
R21
TO CONVERT TO TEST
CONNECT A SPDT SWITCH AS FOLLOWS:
VIA 2
GSPI
FIXTURE DISPLAY BOARD:
REMOVE R22 AND R23.
CONNECT A NORMALLY OPEN PUSHBUTTON
AS FOLLOWS:
A
VIA 3
VIA 5
SPDT
B
VIA 4
10
12
11
8
THE LOCATIONS OF VIA 1 THRU VIA 5
ARE SILKSCREENED ON THE BOARD.
1.50K
0.1W
R6
VIA 1
POSITION B TO TESTS CS7 (DISPLAY) BOARDS.
POSITION A TO TESTS ALL OTHER CHIP SELECT BOARDS.
GSPI
9 J37
MOSI
4 X3
R14
12.1K
0.1W
HC368D
5
6 X3
1
1
GSPI
GSPI
+5SPI
14
C1
47
20V
L 11108
Return to Master TOC
+5SPI
2 J37
GSPI
GSPI
C2
0.1
50V
10 J37
GSPI
X1
HC14AD
7
16
Vcc
16
Vcc
C4
0.1
50V
X2
HC151D
GND
8
C3
0.1
50V
X3
HC368D
GND
8
16
Vcc
C5
0.1
50V
X4
HC165D
GND
8
3
Vdd
C12
X5
0.1
50V MC14489DW
Vss
14
J37 7
MISO
GSPI
DATA_OUT18
BANK1 9
BANK2 13
BANK315
BANK4 16
BANK5 17
ENABLE
A 7
DATA_IN X5
B 6
CLOCK
Rx
C 5
D 4
MC14489DW
E 2
F 1
G 20
H 19
LED5
LED6
LEFT DISPLAY
LED7
LED1
LED2
3
8
THERMAL
LEDS
RIGHT DISPLAY
LED3
LED4
THERMAL LEDS
DATA_OUT18
BANK1 9
BANK2 13
BANK315
BANK4 16
BANK5 17
ENABLE
A 7
DATA_IN X6
B 6
CLOCK
C 5
Rx
D 4
MC14489DW
E 2
F 1
G 20
H 19
a1
b1
c1
d1
e1
f1
g1
h1
LED3
e1
d1
c1
h1
b1
a1
f1
g1
1
2
4
5
6
7
9
10
3
8
DISP5
e1
d1
c1
h1
b1
a1
f1
g1
1
2
4
5
6
7
9
10
3
8
e1 1
d1 2
c1 4
h1 5
b1 6
a1 7
f1 9
g1 10
DISP6
DISP7
e1
d1
c1
h1
b1
a1
f1
g1
1
2
4
5
6
7
9
10
e
d
c
h
b
a
f
g
1
2
4
5
6
7
9
10
3
DATA_OUT18
BANK1 9
BANK2 13
BANK315
BANK4 16
BANK5 17
ENABLE
A 7
DATA_IN X7
B 6
CLOCK
Rx
C 5
D 4
MC14489DW
E 2
F 1
G 20
H 19
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
8
DISP8
a1,b1,c1,d1,e1,f1,g1,h1
LED1
e
d
c
h
b
a
f
g
LED2
1
2
4
5
6
7
9
10
3
DISP1
8
e
d
c
h
b
a
f
g
1
2
4
5
6
7
9
10
3
8
e
d
c
h
b
a
f
g
DISP2
1
2
4
5
6
7
9
10
3
DISP3
8
3
8
FRAME CONNECTION
EARTH GROUND CONNECTION
COMMON CONNECTION
POWER SUPPLY SOURCE POINT
SUPPLY VOLTAGE NET
LED4
UNIFIED SPI PANELS
DISPLAY PCB SCHEMATIC
SHT.
NO. L 11108
SUP’S’D’G.
R20
267
0.1W
29
20
0
LAST NO. USED
11
HC368D
RIGHT DISPLAY BLOCK
10
12
11
8
HC368D
7
1.50K
0.1W
R16
Return to Master TOC
GSPI
4
X1
15
DISP4
SUBJECT
3
12 X3
EQUIP.
TYPE
8
HC14AD
GSPI
THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.
CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.
NONE
PG # 01
SCALE
MLD
CHK.
DR.
DATE 11/06/00
1
+5SPI
GSPI
HC14AD
R10
12.1K
0.1W
1
HC368D
3
XD
6-2-2000A
11-10-2000C
X1
10
HC14AD
2 X3
Ch’ge.Sht.No.
9
X1
GSPI
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE
ON HOLES SIZES PER E-2056
ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS + .O2
ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS + .OO2
ON ALL ANGLES IS + .5 OF A DEGREE
MATERIAL TOLERANCE ("t") TO AGREE
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS
R13
12.1K
0.1W
HC14AD
Y6
CO.
THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.
11
12
HC368D
CLK2 15
CLK1 2
QH 7
QH 9
THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OWNED BY
THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC
AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF
Return to Master TOC
8 J37
SCK
R12
12.1K
0.1W
X1
13 N/C
X3
FILENAME: L11108_3D
6 J37
13
1 SS/PL
10 SA
HC165D
6 H
G
5
4 F
3 E
14 D
13 C
X4
12 B
A
11
14
N.A. SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON A PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD MAY CHANGE
WITHOUT AFFECTING THE INTERCHANGEABILITY OF A COMPLETE BOARD, THIS DIAGRAM MAY
NOT SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS HAVING A COMMON CODE
NUMBER.
5 J37
R11
12.1K
0.1W
R26
1.00K
0.1W
VIA 4
1.00K
0.1W
R28
NOTES :
4 J37
47.5K
0.1W
R27
LABELS
R25
1.00K
0.1W
15
+5SPI
VIA 5
Y 5
RCD-
VIA 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
VIA3
4 D0
3 D1
2 D2
1 D3
15 D4
14 D5
X2
13 D6
12 D7
HC151D
11 A0
10 A1
9 A2
7 STROBE
VIA 1
CS3
Return to Section TOC
6
HC14AD
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537
CAPACITORS = MFD ( .022/50V UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
RESISTORS = Ohms ( 1/4W UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
DIODES = 1A,400V (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
X1
GSPI
CS2
Return to Section TOC
5
R9
12.1K
0.1W
J37
R29
1.00K
0.1W
R22
10.0
0.1W
R23
10.0
0.1W
3
/SS
GSPI
X- 8
SCHEMATIC - DISPLAY PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
CS1
Return to Section TOC
G-11
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
R24
4.75K
0.1W
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
G-11
a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h
LEFT DISPLAY BLOCK
3
Vdd
C11
X6
0.1
50V MC14489DW
Vss
14
3
Vdd
C19
X7
0.1
50V MC14489DW
Vss
14
BOARD I.D. x0000010
LOGIC TABLE
C20
0.1
50V
HC368D
X3
9
INPUTS
/SS CS3 CS2 CS1
10
X
L
X
X
L
H
Z
X
X
L
X
L
H
Z
X
X
X
L
L
H
Z
L
H
H
H
H
L
H...A, SA
* H
H
H
H
L
H
Z
1
GSPI
J37
1 J37
OUTPUTS
X2: /Y
X2: Y
X6: _EN X3: Pin 11
X4: SS/PL X7: _EN
MISO
*
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
G-12
G-12
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
PC BOARD ASSEMBLY-DISPLAY
V
N.A.,N.D.
Return to Master TOC
N.B.
N.B.
N.B.
N.B.
1
N.A.,N.E.
N.A.
2.95
1.75
1.60
1.45
C20
SPI DISPLAY
R6
R21
L11130-3
LED5
C11
Return to Section TOC
N.A.
N.A.
ITEM
REQ'D
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
1
L11130-D
DISPLAY P.C. BOARD BLANK (REF ONLY)
2
1
L11166-1
FLEX CIRCUIT
3
4
T15176-2
LED, SPACER, 0,140 HIGH
4
.01 OZ.
E3539
ELECTRICAL INSULATING COMPOUND
FOR ITEMS BELOW REFER TO ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS DATABASE FOR COMPONENT
SPECIFICATIONS
C1
1 S25024-7SMT
CAPACITOR, SMD, TANTALUM, 47ME, 20V, 10% , S7343
C2, C3, C4, C5, C11, C12, C19,
8 S25020-3SMT
CAPACITOR, SMD, CERAMIC, 0.1ME, 50V, 10% , X7R, S0805
C20
DISP1, DISP2, DISP3, DISP4
8 S17395-6
LED, DISPLAY, 7-SEGMENT, CC, BRIGHT
DISP5, DISP6, DISP7, DISP8
J37
1 S18248-10
CONNECTOR, MOLEX, MINI, PCB, 10-PIN
LED1, LED2, LED3, LED4
4 T13657-6
LED, T-1, RED, HLMP-K101
LED 5, LED6, LED7
3 T13657-12
LED, T-1, 3/4, YELLOW, HIGH-INTENSITY
R6, R16
2 S25000-1501SMT RESISTOR, SMD, METAL FILM, 1/10W, 1.50K, 1% , S0805
R9, R10, R11, R12, R13, R14
6 S25000-1212SMT RESISTOR, SMD, METAL FILM, 1/10W, 12.1K, 1% , S0805
R20
1 S25000-2670SMT RESISTOR, SMD, METAL FILM, 1/10W, 267OHMS, 1% , S0805
R21, R25, R26, R28, R29
5 S25000-1001SMT RESISTOR, SMD, METAL FILM, 1/10W, 1.00K, 1% , S0805
R22, R23
2 S25000-10R0SMT RESISTOR, SMD, METAL FILM, 1/10W, 10.0OHMS, 1% , S0805
R24
1 S25000-4751SMT RESISTOR, SMD, METAL FILM, 1/10W, 4.75K, 1% , S0805
R27
1 S25000-4752SMT RESISTOR, SMD, METAL FILM, 1/10W, 47.5K, 1% , S0805
X1
1 S17900-8SMT
IC, SMD, CMOS, INVERTER, SCHMITT, HEX, HC14A (SS)
X2
1 S17900-26SMT
IC, CMOS, SMD, MUX, DAT, 8-INPUT, HC151 (SS)
X3
1 S17900-28SMT
IC, SMD, CMOS, INVERTING BUFFER, 3-ST (SS)
X4
1 S17900-10SMT
IC, SMD, CMOS, REGISTER, SHFT, S-PI/SO, 8-BIT (SS)
X5, X6, X7
3 S20496-1SMT
IC, SMD, CMOS, DRIVER, DISPLAY, LED, CC, MCU
LED
X6
N.A.
1
R25
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
3
C2
0
0
N.A.
J37
R14
R9
R10
2
R23
DISP7
X4 LED4
R29
DISP5 DISP6
LED3
C3
R11
3
DISP8
R20
X3
R13
C1
X1
C19
N.C.
DISP4
LED2
R16
R24
DISP3
X7
C4 R22
DISP2
LED1
R12
DISP1
.50
X2
X5 LED6
LED7
C12
R28
C5
5
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED:
CAPACITORS = MFD/VOLTS
INDUCTANCE = HENRIES
RESISTANCE = OHMS
R26
4
R27
GROUND SIDE
5.65
5.75
NOTES:
N.A. DO NOT COAT WITH ENCAPSULATION MATERIAL.
N.B.
CAUTION: THIS DEVICE IS SUBJECT TO DAMAGE BY STATIC
ELECTRICITY. SEE E2454 BEFORE HANDLING.
N.C. USE ITEM 3 TO STAND LED1, LED2,LED3 AND LED4 FROM THE P.C. BOARD. THERE
MUST NOT BE MORE THAN .020 GAP BETWEEN SPACER AND P.C. BOARD OR
BETWEEN SPACER AND LED. ENCAPSULATE P.C.BOARD, SPACER AND LOWER HALF
OF LED.
5.90
N.D. DISP 1 THRU DISP 8 MUST ALWAYS BE MATCHED BY VENDOR NAME.
DO NOT MIX DIFFERENT VENDORS ON THE SAME BOARD ASSEMBLY.
N.E. CONNECTOR MUST BE GREASED WITH ITEM 4 PRIOR TO ENCAPSULATION.
2
BUY AS:
ENCAPSULATE WITH HUMISEAL 1A27LU PER
E1844 OR WITH EQUIVALENT AS APPROVED
BY LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY. (2 COATS)
IDENTIFICATION CODE
BUY PER E3867
TEST PER E3856-D
THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY, CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE
MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE PER E2056
ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS ± .02
ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS ± .002
ON ALL ANGLES IS ± .5 OF A DEGREE
MATERIAL TOLERANCE (" t ") TO AGREE
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS.
DO NOT SCALE THIS DRAWING
NOTE:
"X" INFO.
Chg. Sheet No.
XM5626
6-2-2000A
XA
8-4-2000C
DESIGN INFORMATION
REFERENCE:
DRAWN BY:
L11130-2
ENGINEER:
APPROVED:
JB/
SUPERSEDING:
EQUIPMENT TYPE:
SUBJECT:
SCALE: FULL
MISCELLANEOUS
SPI DISPLAY P.C. BOARD ASSEMBLY
DATE: 5-11-2000 DRAWING No.:
L 11130-3
Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the
machine.
SOLID EDGE
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
PART NO.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
+15 VDC
1 J60
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
SCHEMATIC - LED SELECT PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
5 J60
LED_BANK_1
2 J60
LED_BANK_2
3 J60
SWITCH
4 J60
LED4
LED2
LED5
LED3
LED6
LED_BANK_1
LED_BANK_2
R2
750
S1
THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO. AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO. CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.
N.A.
Return to Master TOC
LED1
R1
750
J60
NOTES :
Return to Section TOC
G-13
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
S 25259-1B0
Return to Section TOC
G-13
A PRINTED
SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON
CIRCUIT BOARD MAY CHANGE WITHOUT AFFECTING
THE INTERCHANGEABILITY OF A COMPLETE BOARD.
THIS DIAGRAM MAY NOT SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS
CODE NUMBER.
OR CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS HAVING A COMMON
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE
ON HOLES SIZES PER E2056
ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS + .O2
ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS + .OO2
ON ALL ANGLES IS + .5 OF A DEGREE
MATERIAL TOLERANCE ("t") TO AGREE
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS
DO NOT SCALE THIS DRAWING
Chg. Sheet No.
XA
1-25-2002
GENERAL INFORMATION
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
CAPACITORS = MFD (
RESISTORS = Ohms (
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
DIODES =
(UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
------------------
"X" INFO.
DESIGN INFORMATION
DRAWN BY:
ENGINEER:
REVISED BY:
LABELS
SUPPLY
LAST NO. USED
VOLTAGE NET
POWER SUPPLY SOURCE POINT
COMMON CONNECTION
EARTH GROUND CONNECTION
FILENAME:
EQUIPMENT TYPE:
V-350
SUBJECT:
SCHEMATIC,
DATE: 01/17/02
SCALE: ----
RCD-
FRAME CONNECTION
2
_
_
S25259_1B
LED SELECT
PC
BOARD
DRWG.
REF.: ------ NO.
S25259-1B0
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
G-14
G-14
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
PC BOARD ASSEMBLY-LED SELECT
P.C. BOARD BLANK INFORMATION:
MAKE FROM S19399 (MAKES 63 BOARDS
PER PANEL, SEE ELECTRONIC FILE FOR
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION)
BLANK PART NUMBER
M19875-B
ITEM
REQ'D
1
2
1
1
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
SEE BLANK P.C. BOARD BLANK
CI001498
E3165-.25-.75-.20
FOR ITEMS BELOW REFER TO ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS DATABASE FOR COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
J60
LED1,LED2,LED3,LED4,LED5,
LED6
R1,R2
S1
CATHODE
(SQUARE)
1
S19365-5
CONNECTOR,PCB,WW,MALE,RT-L,15-PIN
6
T13657-13
LED,T-1,3/4,RED,HIGH-INTENSITY, OVAL
2
1
S19400-7500 RESISTOR, MF, 1/4W, 750, 1%
T13381-16 SWITCH,PUSHBUTTON,SPST
RESISTANCE = OHMS
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
ANODE
(ROUND)
1
ENLARGED DETAIL
(LED ORIENTATION)
N.A.
N.D.
1.33
M19875-1
LED3
Return to Master TOC
2
N.B.
LED5
LED4
LED2
LED1
LED SELECT
R1
R2
LED6
Return to Section TOC
MANUFACTURE AS:
M19875-1B0
S1
IDENTIFICATION CODE
PART NO.
J60
ENCAPSULATE WITH E1844. (2 COATS)
BRUSH COAT ACCEPTABLE
0
0
N.C.
N.E.
2.55
NOTES:
N.A. DO NOT COAT WITH ENCAPSULATION MATERIAL.
N.A.
N.B. INSERT ITEM 2 BETWEEN ROWS OF LED'S. ITEM 2
MUST BE FLUSH WITH LED BULB.
FOR PARTS ORDERS ONLY:
TEST PER E3964-ST
SCHEMATIC REFERENCE: S25259-1B0
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE
MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE PER E2056
ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS ± .02
ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS ± .002
ON ALL ANGLES IS ± .5 OF A DEGREE
MATERIAL TOLERANCE (" t ") TO AGREE
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS.
DO NOT SCALE THIS DRAWING
NOTE:
"X" INFO.
Chg. Sheet No.
1-25-2002
DESIGN INFORMATION
REFERENCE:
DRAWN BY:
M19874-1
F.V.
ENGINEER: Craig Hejl
APPROVED:
SUPERSEDING:
EQUIPMENT TYPE:
SUBJECT:
SCALE: FUL
INVERTER WELDERS
LED SELECT PC BD AS'BLY
DATE: 3-21-2001 DRAWING No.:
M 19875-1
Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the
machine.
SOLID EDGE
THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY, CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.
EN-166
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
N.C. ENCAPSULATE PC BOARD AND LOWER HALF OF LED.
N.D. ENCAPSULATE AROUND BASE OF COMPONENT
N.E. COAT EXTERNAL PINS WITH ENCAPSULATION MATERIAL.
V350-PRO
+15V
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
POT_1
S1
+15 VDC
4 J61
POT_SUPPLY VDC
14 J61
GND
CW
10K
+10VREF
+10VREF
POT_2
13 J61
GND
10 J61
11 J61
LED_2
2 J61
LED_3
1 J61
LED_4
6 J61
LED_5
7 J61
LED1
LED2
GND
12 J61
CW
10K
GND
J61
LED3
LED4
LED5
THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO. AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO. CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.
NOTES :
N.A.
Return to Master TOC
15 J61
LED_1
3 J61
R1
5 J61
+15V
8 J61
9 J61
Return to Section TOC
+15V
+10VREF
R2
Return to Master TOC
SCHEMATIC - LED POTENTIOMETER PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
SWITCH
Return to Section TOC
G-15
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
S 25258
Return to Section TOC
G-15
A PRINTED
SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON
CIRCUIT BOARD MAY CHANGE WITHOUT AFFECTING
THE INTERCHANGEABILITY OF A COMPLETE BOARD.
THIS DIAGRAM MAY NOT SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS
OR CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS HAVING A COMMON
CODE NUMBER.
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE
ON HOLES SIZES PER E2056
ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS + .O2
ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS + .OO2
ON ALL ANGLES IS + .5 OF A DEGREE
MATERIAL TOLERANCE ("t") TO AGREE
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS
DO NOT SCALE THIS DRAWING
Chg. Sheet No.
GENERAL INFORMATION
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
CAPACITORS = MFD (
RESISTORS = Ohms (
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
DIODES =
(UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
------------------
"X" INFO.
DESIGN INFORMATION
5011992
DRAWN BY: CFH
XA
ENGINEER: CFH
REVISED BY: ---
LABELS
SUPPLY
LAST NO. USED
VOLTAGE NET
POWER SUPPLY SOURCE POINT
COMMON CONNECTION
FRAME CONNECTION
EARTH GROUND CONNECTION
FILENAME:
RCD-
_
_
_
S25258-1A
EQUIPMENT TYPE:
V350 LED/POT
SUBJECT:
LED/POT PCB SCHEMATIC
DRWG.
DATE: 03/08/01 SCALE: ---- REF.: -----NO. S 25258
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
G-16
G-16
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
PC BOARD ASSEMBLY-LED POTENTIOMETER
P.C. BOARD BLANK INFORMATION:
MAKE FROM S19399 (MAKES 18 BOARDS
PER PANEL, SEE ELECTRONIC FILE FOR
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION)
BLANK PART NUMBER
M19874-A
ITEM
REQ'D
1
2
1
10
PART NO
SEE BLANK
T15176-1
DESCRIPTION
P.C. BOARD BLANK
LED SPACER
FOR ITEMS BELOW REFER TO ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS DATABASE FOR COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
J61
LED1,LED2,LED3,LED4,LED5
R1,R2
S1
1
5
2
1
S19365-15
T13657-11
S19366-1
T13381-17
CONNECTOR,PCB,WW,MALE,RT-L,15-PIN
LED,T-1,3/4,RED,HIGH-INTENSITY
POT,ST,0.5W,10K,10%,LINEAR
SWITCH,PUSHBUTTON,SPST,GREEN,W/BLACK
RESISTANCE = OHMS
N.B.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
N.C.
N.D.
N.C.
1.90
LED/POT
J61
LED1
MANUFACTURE AS:
M19874-1A2
M19874-1
LED2
.88
LED3
S1
LED4
R2
R1
IDENTIFICATION CODE
PART NO.
LED5
2
0
1.80
5.35
N.A.
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
0
ENCAPSULATE WITH E1844. (2 COATS)
BRUSH COAT ACCEPTABLE
N.C.
NOTES:
N.A. DO NOT COAT WITH ENCAPSULATION MATERIAL.
N.B. THERE MUST NOT BE MORE THAN A .010 GAP
BETWEEN SPACER & LED, OR BETWEEN SPACER
& P.C. BOARD. ENCAPSULATE P.C. BOARD,
SPACERS & LOWER HALF OF LED. LEDS MUST BE
PERPENDICULAR WITH P.C. BOARD.
FOR PARTS ORDERS ONLY:
TEST PER E3964-MS
SCHEMATIC REFERENCE: S25258-1A1
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE
MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE PER E2056
ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS ± .02
ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS ± .002
NOTE:
ON ALL ANGLES IS ± .5 OF A DEGREE
MATERIAL TOLERANCE (" t ") TO AGREE
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS.
DO NOT SCALE THIS DRAWING
"X" INFO.
Chg. Sheet No.
1-25-2002
DESIGN INFORMATION
DRAWN BY:
ENGINEER: Craig Hejl
APPROVED:
REFERENCE:
F.V.
SUPERSEDING:
EQUIPMENT TYPE:
SUBJECT:
SCALE: FULL
INVERTER WELDERS
LED POT P.C. BOARD ASSEMBLY
DATE: 3-9-2001
DRAWING No.:
M 19874-1
Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the
machine.
SOLID EDGE
THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY, CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.
EN-166
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
N.C. ENCAPSULATE AROUND BASE OF COMPONENT
N.D. COAT EXTERNAL PINS WITH ENCAPSULATION MATERIAL.
V350-PRO
SCHEMATIC-SPI REMOTE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
SPI CONNECTIONS
SCLK
7 J33
R6
12.1K
0.1W
13
12
X1
HC14AD
5
R5
12.1K
0.1W
1
R3
12.1K
0.1W
9
6
X1
AD_CS
AD_DI
HC14AD
2
X1
HC14AD
8
X1
HC14AD
R7
267
0.1W
R13
R10
243
1W
C3
0.1
50V
REMOTE OUTPUT ENABLES
\
4.75K
0.1W
H=OPEN
L=CLOSED
14 PIN
6 J331
R14
R11
243
1W
C4
0.1
50V
R27
SOL_PULL_IN
SOL_DRIVE
ENABLE
STAT
MOD
REM
MISO
6PIN_OUT_EN
14PIN_OUT_EN
INV_OUT_SW
OUTPUT_SW
MODE_SEL_SW
STUDS_SW
AD_CLK
INVCLK
MAIN_OSC
Q2
0.5A
40V
R19
332
0.1W
DZ2
5.1V
3W
500
221
0.1W
+5SPI
GSPI
+5VREF
FUNCTION ENABLE
JUMPERS
STATUS MODE
R30
4.75K
0.1W
1 J333
11 J332
LOCAL SWITCH
INTERFACE
STATUS_SENSE
4.75K
0.1W
4.75K
0.1W
+15SPI
+15V TO MODE
12 J332
MODE SELECT SW
13 J332
STUD CONTROL SW
OUTPUT
CONTROL SW
4 J333
5 J333
2
R68
2.67K
0.1W
R100
13 J333
R22
10.0K
0.1W
1.00K
0.1W
D6
0.2A
30V
3
1 2
R64
1.21K
R63
1.21K
R62
1.21K
+5SPI
6_PIN_DETECT
14_PIN_DETECT
10.0K
0.1W
Q5
0.115A
60V
MODE LED 2
MODE LED 3
J332 16
J332 15
MODE LED 4
MODE LED 5
J333 9
J333 14
OUTPUT LOCAL LED
OUTPUT REMOTE LED
J333 11
J333 15
R72
1.21K
10.0K
0.1W
MODE LED 1
J333 10
J333 16
R71
1.21K
35
EX2
36 MODE_LED1
37 MODE_LED2
38 MODE_LED3
43 MODE_LED4
44 MODE_LED5
24 OUTPUT_LOCAL
25 OUTPUT_REMOTE
26 STUDS_HOT
27 STUDS_REMOTE
28
29
33 STATUS_STOP
34 EX1
17
15
30
16
STUD HOT LED
J333 12
STUD REMOTE LED
Q6
0.115A
60V
GSPI
CPLD2
STATUS_STOP
I/O1B1
I/O1B2 39
SOLENOID
I/O2B1
I/O2B2 38
OSC_NEG_PS
I/O4B1
I/O4B2 37
6_PIN_SENSE
I/O6B1
I/O7B2 32
31
14_PIN_SENSE
I/O8B1
I/O8B2
I/O9B1
I/O9B2 30 EX1
BLOCK 1
I/O10B1
I/O10B2 29
EX2
I/O11B1
I/O11B2 28
BLOCK 2
I/O12B1
I/O12B2 27
I/O13B1
I/O13B2 23
X3
I/O14B1
I/O14B2 22
I/O15B1
I/O15B2 21
XC9536
I/O16B1
I/O16B2 20
AD_DOUT
I/O17B1
I/O17B2 19
I/O/GCK1
TCK 11
TDI 9
I/O/GCK2
TDO 24
I/O/GCK3
I/O/GTS1
TMS 10
I/O/GTS2
I/O/GSR
FTP1 FTP2 FTP3 FTP4
LOCAL POT INTERFACE
10.0K
0.1W
0.5%
R35
+5VREF
9
R49
10.0K
0.1W
10
X7
8
33074D
R106
56.2K
0.1W
+10VREF
6
R33
100
0.1W
J332 6
J333 6
+10VREF_MODE
+10VREF_STATUS
3 J332
LEFT_MODE
POT_WIPER
R103
56.2K
0.1W
C57
0.1
50V
10.0K
0.1W
0.5%
C48
0.1
50V
X6
5
C54
0.1
50V
7
33074D
GSPI
R107
56.2K
0.1W
+5VREF
J332 4
J333 7
C24
0.1
50V
+10V_COM_MODE
+10V_COM_STATUS
2
5 J332
RIGHT_MODE
POT_WIPER
GSPI
R104
56.2K
0.1W
GSPI
C49
0.1
50V
2
R50
4.75K
0.1W
0.5%
D4
0.2A
30V
3
1
GSPI
LMODE_POT
4.75K
0.1W
0.5%
C58
0.022
50V
+5SPI
GSPI
GSPI
16 AD_DOUT
19
14
13
+5SPI
+10VREF
A/D CONVERTER
C55
0.1
50V
X7
3
1
33074D
GSPI
R23
10.0K
0.1W
1.00K
0.1W
R24
10.0K
0.1W
1.00K
0.1W
GSPI
D7
0.2A
30V
3
1 2
2
R52
4.75K
0.1W
0.5%
D2
0.2A
30V
3
1
GSPI
RMODE_POT
4.75K
0.1W
0.5%
C59
0.022
50V
+5SPI
6
D8
0.2A
30V
3
1
MODE_SEL_SW
C45
1.0
35V
8 J333
STATUS
POT_WIPER
+5VREF
+5SPI
14
C28
0.1
50V
STUDS_SW
+15SPI
+5SPI
GSPI
C44
1.0
35V
X1
HC14AD
7
C25
0.1
50V
21 41 32
X4
XC9572
10 23 31
C36
0.1
50V
C37
0.1
50V
C26
0.1
50V
15 35 26
X3
XC9536
17 4 25
C35
0.1
50V
X13
9
MC1413BD
8
C27
0.1
50V
R105
56.2K
0.1W
C50
0.1
50V
C56
0.1
50V
X7
5
7
33074D
2
R54
4.75K
0.1W
0.5%
D3
0.2A
30V
3
1
GSPI
STATUS_POT
4.75K
0.1W
0.5%
C60
0.022
50V
GSPI
20
Vdd
X5
MC145051DW
Vss
10
GSPI
J332 10
NO CONN.
GENERAL INFORMATION
J332 9
NO CONN.
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537
CAPACITORS = MFD ( .022/50V UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
RESISTORS = Ohms ( 1/4W UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
DIODES = 1A,400V (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
J332 8
GSPI
KEY ON
MODE
CONNECTOR
LABELS
R-
108
C-
62
D-
20
LAST NO. USED
D-20
DZ-10
Q-9
X-13
L-1
SUPPLY VOLTAGE NET
POWER SUPPLY SOURCE POINT
COMMON CONNECTION
GSPI
R70
2.67K
0.1W
R65
1.21K
R108
56.2K
0.1W
GSPI
R69
2.67K
0.1W
R101
+15V TO STATUS
MC1413BD
+5SPI
R102
+15V TO STATUS
C2
0.1
50V
40
41
42
2
3
5
6
7
8
12
13
14
16
18
43
44
1
36
34
33
X13
J332 7
J332 2
J332 1
GSPI
+15SPI
3 J333
STATUS_POT
MODE_SENSE
C1
0.1
50V
I/O/GTS1
I/O/GTS2
I/O/GSR
I/O1B
I/O2B
I/O3B
I/O4B
I/O5B
I/O6B
I/O1D
I/O2D
I/O3D
I/O4D
I/O5D
I/O6D
I/O7D
I/O8D
TCK
TDI
TDO
TMS
17 Din
1 AN0
2 AN1
3 AN2
4 AN3
5 AN4
Dout
6 AN5
EOC
X5
INV_OUT_SW
7 AN6
Vref
8 AN7
Vag
9 AN8 MC145051DW
11 AN9
12 AN10
15 CS
AD_CS
AD_CLK 18 SCLK
AD_DI
6_PIN_POT
14_PIN_POT
LMODE_POT
RMODE_POT
+5SPI
14 J332
2 J333
I/O1A
I/O2A
I/O3A BLOCK 1
BLOCK 2
I/O4A
I/O5A
I/O6A
I/O1C
I/O2C
I/O3C
I/O4C
X4
I/O5C
I/O6C BLOCK3
BLOCK4
I/O7C
I/O8C
I/O/GCK1
I/O/GCK2
XC9572
I/O/GCK3
+5VREF
GSPI
R26
Return to Master TOC
8 OSCIN
VCC 3
7 XTAL
I/O 1 MAIN_OSC
6 OE X2 OUT0 2
5 PDN/SELX GND 4
C23
0.1
DS1075Z
50V
GSPI
CPLD1
GSPI
221
0.1W
+5SPI
GSPI
2
1
2
3
INVSS 4
INVCS3 8
INVCS2 9
INVCS1 11
INVMOSI 12
REM 13
MOD 14
STAT 18
ENABLE 19
SOL_DRIVE 20
SOL_PULL_IN 22
INVCLK 5
MODE_SENSE 6
STATUS_SENSE 7
42
40
39
Q1
0.5A
40V
R18
332
0.1W
DZ1
5.1V
3W
500
R28
5 J331
4.75K
0.1W
H=OPEN
L=CLOSED
R31
6 PIN
4
500
R32
\
2
+15SPI
R16
R9
243
1W
250KHZ OSCILLATOR
Return to Master TOC
+5SPI
HC14AD
R1
12.1K
0.1W
11 J331
4
Return to Section TOC
4
X1
+5SPI
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
MISO
3
R67
1.21K
R66
1.21K
R51
8 J33
R2
12.1K
0.1W
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
R53
9 J33
MOSI
HC14AD
O0 16
O1 15
O2 14
O3 13
O4 12
O5 11
O6 10
R55
4 J33
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
R46
5 J33
CS2
LOCAL LED
INTERFACE
10
X1
R45
6 J33
CS3
11
R4
12.1K
0.1W
R34
3 J33
/SS
CS1
Return to Section TOC
G-17
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
R25
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
G-17
OUTPUT_SW
C46
1.0
35V
THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OWNED BY
THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC
AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF
SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON A PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARD MAY CHANGE WITHOUT AFFECTING
THE INTERCHANGEABILITY OF A COMPLETE BOARD,
THIS DIAGRAM MAY NOT SHOW THE EXACT
COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS HAVING
A COMMON CODE NUMBER.
Ch’ge.Sht.No.
1-25-2002
FRAME CONNECTION
CO.
THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.
THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.
CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.
NONE
PG # 01
SCALE
--DR.
DATE 01/10/02 CHK.
EARTH GROUND CONNECTION
EQUIP.
TYPE
SUBJECT
COMMON CONTROLS
SPI REMOTE/UI PCB SCHEMATIC
SHT.
SUP’S’D’G.
NO. G 4017-1C0/1
PLOTTING DELIMITER - DON’T DELETE
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
G-18
PC BOARD ASSEMBLY-SPI REMOTE
V
N.B.
N.C.
N.D.
N.K.
N.F.
2
1
N.G.
3
N.E.
6.14
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
G-18
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
N.L.
REMOTE
G4018-1
N.A.
3.64
N.A.
ITEM
REQ'D PART No.
DESCRIPTION
1
1
G4018-C
SPI REMOTE/UI PC BOARD BLANK
2
1
M19436-3
POTTING TRAY
3
2
S8025-80
SELF TAPPING SCREW
4
1
L11166-1
FLEX CIRCUIT ASSEMBLY
EPOXY ENCAPSULATING RESIN
5
4.00 fl oz E2527
ELECTRICAL INSULATING COMPOUND
6
.108 fl oz E3539
7
1
S25336-1
SOFTWARE CPLD (X3)
8
1
S25337-1
SOFTWARE CPLD (X4)
9
1
PROGRAM X2 to 250K Hz
10
1
S24671
KEYING PLUG
FOR ITEMS BELOW, REFER TO ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS DATABASE FOR COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
C1,C2,C3,C4,C5,C6,C7,C8,C9
44 S25020-3SMT
CAPACITOR,SMD,CERAMIC,0.1MF,50V,10%,X7R,S0805
C10,C11,C12,C13,C14,C15
C16,C17,C18,C19,C20,C21
C22,C23,C24,C25,C26,C27
C28,C29,C30,C31,C32,C33
C34,C35,C36,C37,C48,C49
C50,C54,C55,C56,C57
C38,C39
2 S25020-5SMT
CAPACITOR,SMD,CERAMIC,2700pF,50V,5%,X7R,S0805
C40
1 S13490-183
CAPACITOR,ALEL,120MF,50V,20%
C41
1 S25020-17SMT
CAPACITOR,SMD,CERAMIC,0.27MF,50V,10%,X7R,S1812
C42
1 S13490-179
CAPACITOR,ALEL,1000,35V,20%
C43
1 S25024-10SMT
CAPACITOR,SMD,TANTALUM,22MF,25V,10%,S7343
C44,C45,C46
3 S25024-2SMT
CAPACITOR,SMD,TANTALUM,1.0MF,35V,10%,S3528
C47,C51,C52,C53
4 S25024-3SMT
CAPACITOR,SMD,TANTALUM,2.2MF,20V,10%,S3528
C58,C59,C60,C61,C62
5 S25020-2SMT
CAPACITOR,SMD,CERAMIC,0.022MF,50V,10%,X7R,S0805
D1,D2,D3,D4,D5,D6,D7,D8
8 S25049-4SMT
DIODE,SMD,DUAL,200MA,30V,SCHOTTKY,SOT-23
D9,D10,D11
3 S25040-1SMT
DIODE,SMD,1A,400V,FAST RECOVERY,DO-214BA
D12,D13,D14,D15
4 S25040-2SMT
DIODE,SMD,1A,400V,DO-214BA/AC
D16,D17
2 S25040-5SMT
DIODE,SMD,DUAL,0.200A,70V,UFR
D18,D19
2 S25040-4SMT
DIODE,SMD,DUAL,0.200A,70V,UFR
D20
1 S25049-2SMT
DIODE,SMD,1A,30V,SMA,SCHOTTKY
DZ1,DZ2
2 S25044-1SMT
ZENER DIODE,SMD,3W,5.1V,5%, SMB
DZ3,DZ4,DZ5,DZ6,DZ7,DZ8
6 S25044-3SMT
ZENER DIODE,SMD,3W,12V,5%, SMB
DZ9,DZ10
2 S25045-1SMT
ZENER_DIODE,SMD,225mW,12V,5%,SOT-23
FTP1,FTP2,FTP3,FTP4,FTP5
6 TESTPT_FUNTION FUNCTIONAL TEST POINT
FTP6
J33
1 S18248-10
CONNECTOR,MOLEX,MINI,PCB,10-PIN
J331
1 S24020-12
CONNECTOR,MOLEX,MINI,PCB,12-PIN,TIN
J332,J333
2 S24020-16
CONNECTOR,MOLEX,MINI,PCB,16-PIN,TIN
L1
1 S25083-3SMT
CHOKE,SMD,POWER,47UH,10%,1.25A,
Q1,Q2,Q3,Q4
4 S25050-1SMT
TRANSISTOR,SMD,NPN,0.5A,40V,SOT-23,MMBT4401LT1
Q5,Q6
2 S25051-4SMT
TRANSISTOR,SMD,NMF,SOT-23,0.115A,60V,7002LT1(SS)
Q7,Q8
2 S25050-2SMT
TRANSISTOR,SMS,PNP,SOT23,0.5A, 40V,MMBT4403LT1
Q9
1 S25051-6SMT
TRANSISTOR,SMD,NMF,DPAK,TO-252,10A,100V(SS)
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
R1,R2,R3,R4,R5,R6
R7
R8,R9,R10,R11,R12
R13,R14,R15,R16,R17
R18,R19
R20,R21,R25,R26,R27,R28
R29,R30
R22,R23,R24,R36,R37,R45
R46,R47,R48,R49
R31,R32
R33
R34,R35
R50,R51,R52,R53,R54,R55
R56,R57,R58,R59,R60,R61
R62,R63,R64,R65,R66,R67
R71,R72
R68,R69,R70
R74
R75,R76,R77,R78
R79,R80
R81,R82
R83,R84,R85,R86
R87,R88,R89,R90
R91,R92
R93,R94
R95
R96
R97
R98,R99
R100,R101,R102
R103,R104,R105,R106,R107
R108
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6,X7,X8
X9
X10
X11
X12
X13
6
1
5
5
2
8
S25000-1212SMT
S25000-2670SMT
S25004-2430SMT
S18380-14
S25000-3320SMT
S25000-4751SMT
RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,12.1K,1%,S0805
RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,267OHMS,1%,S0805
RESISTOR,SMD,1W,243OHMS,1%
THERMISTOR,PTC,500OHMS,28mA
RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,332OHMS,1%,S0805
RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,4.75K,1%,S0805
10
S25000-1002SMT RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,10.0K,1%,S0805
2
1
2
12
S25000-2210SMT
S25000-1000SMT
S25008-1002SMT
S25008-4751SMT
RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,221OHMS,1%,S0805
RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,100OHMS,1%,S0805
RESISTOR,SMD,PREC,MF,1/10W,10.0K,0.5%,S0805
RESISTOR,SMD,PREC,MF,1/10W,4.75K,0.5%,S0805
8
S25001-1211SMT RESISTOR,SMD,1.21K,1/4W,1206,1%,TR
3
1
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
1
1
1
2
3
6
S25000-2671SMT
S25001-1001SMT
S25001-1000SMT
S25000-2211SMT
S25001-1213SMT
S25000-3321SMT
S25010-3SMT
S25000-4752SMT
S25000-2001SMT
S25000-3741SMT
S25000-3011SMT
S25000-2672SMT
S25000-2002SMT
S25000-1001SMT
S25000-5622SMT
RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,2.67K,1%,S0805
RESISTOR,SMD,1K,1/4W,1206,1%,TR
RESISTOR,SMD,100OHMS,1/4W,1206,1%,TR
RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,2.21K,1%,S0805
RESISTOR,SMD,121K,1/4W,1206,1%,TR
RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,3.32K,1%,S0805
RESISTOR,SMD,MF,1W,20.0K,1%,SURGE
RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,47.5K,1%,S0805
RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,2.00K,1%,S0805
RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,3.74K,1%,S0805
RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,3.01K,1%,S0805
RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,26.7K,1%,S0805
RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,20.0K,1%,S0805
RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,1.00K,1%,S0805
RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,56.2K,1%,S0805
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
S17900-8SMT
S25070-11SMT
S25070-3SMT
S25070-10SMT
M15105-7SMT
S15128-18SMT
S15018-11SMT
S15128-10SMT
S15018-21SMT
S25068-14SMT
M15102-4SMT
IC,SMD,CMOS,INVERTER,SCHMITT,HEX,HC14A(SS)
IC,SMD,CMOS,OSCILLATOR,DIVIDER,60MHZ,SOIC8,(SS)
CPLD,PROGRAMMABLE,XC9536,44-PIN,VQFP(SS)
IC,SMD,CMOS,CPLD,XC9572,PLCC44(SS)
IC,SMD,CMOS,CONVERTER,A/D,MPU,10-BIT(SS)
IC,OP-AMP,SMT,QUAD,HIGH-PERF,33074D
IC,SMD,CMOS,SWITCH,ANALOG,QUAD,201(SS)
IC,SMD,VOLTAGE REF,ADJ, PRECISION,431I,SOIC-8
IC,SMD,CMOS,DRIVER,MOSFET,4451, SOIC-8(SS)
IC,SMD,VOLTAGE REGULATOR,ADJ,FLYBACK,3A,TO-263
IC,ARRAY,DRIVER,PERIPHERAL,NPN,DARLINGTON
P.C. BOARD BLANK REFERENCE INFORMATION
BUY COMPLETE AS G4018-C (4 LAYER BOARD PER E3281)
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED:
CAPACITANCE = MFD/VOLTS
INDUCTANCE = HENRIES
RESISTANCE = OHMS
N.K.
N.E.
N.H.
N.E.
SCHEMATIC REFERENCE: G4017-1C0
BUY AS:
G 4 0 1 8 - 1 C 0
N.K PLACE ITEM 10 ON PIN 8 OF J332 AS SHOWN.
N.L. BOARD TO BE POTTED WITH ITEM 4 LAYING ACROSS BOARD AS SHOWN.
ONLY 0.4" OR LESS OF ITEM 4 TO BE COVERED WITH ITEM 5.
PART NUMBER
IDENTIFICATION CODE
BUY PER E3867
TEST PER E3964-RM
THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY, CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE
MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE PER E2056
ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS ± .02
ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS ± .002
NOTE:
ON ALL ANGLES IS ± .5 OF A DEGREE
MATERIAL TOLERANCE (" t ") TO AGREE
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS.
DO NOT SCALE THIS DRAWING
"X" INFO.
Chg. Sheet No.
1-25-02
DESIGN INFORMATION
DRAWN BY:
F.V.
ENGINEER: Ed Furman
APPROVED:
REFERENCE:
L11346-1
SUPERSEDING:
EQUIPMENT TYPE:
SUBJECT:
SCALE: FULL
MISCELLANEOUS
SPI REMOTE/UI P.C. BOARD ASSEMBLY
DATE: 3-27-2001 DRAWING No.:
G 4018-1
Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the
machine.
SOLID EDGE
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
NOTES:
N.A. CAUTION: THIS DEVICE IS SUBJECT TO DAMAGE BY STATIC ELECTRICITY. SEE E2454
BEFORE HANDLING.
N.B. PROGRAM X3 WITH ITEM 7.
N.C. PROGRAM X4 WITH ITEM 8.
N.D. PROGRAM X2 WITH ITEM 9.
N.E. ALL CONNECTORS MUST BE GREASED WITH ITEM 6 PRIOR TO ENCAPSULATION.
N.F. ATTACH ITEM 1 TO ITEM 2 WITH ITEM 3. TIGHTEN ITEM 3 TO .60 ± .05 Nm (5.3 ± .5 in-lbs.).
N.G. PLACE BARCODED ASSEMBLY NUMBER IDENTIFICATION AND BARCODED SERIAL
IDENTIFICATION IN AREA SHOWN.
N.H. THESE COMPONENTS MUST BE COMPLETELY COVERED WITH ITEM 5.
EN-170
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
4
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
G-19
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
G-19
SCHEMATIC-SNUBBER PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
6-2-2000
S24761
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
G-20
G-20
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
PC BOARD ASSEMBLY-SNUBBER
ITEM
C1,C2,C3,C4
R1,R3
R2,R4
1
REQ'D
4
2
2
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
S20500-4 CAPACITOR,PPMF,.0047,1000V,BOX
T14648-20 RESISTOR,WW,5W,150,5%,SQ
T14648-25 RESISTOR,WW,5W,10,5%,SQ
Return to Master TOC
2.90 +.04
3
ITEM
1
2
3
4
2
4
C3
RW5F
M195321
BOXCP4
C1
BOXCP4
T14710
RW5F
1.92
1
R3
R1
QC1
6
1
R .045
2
Return to Master TOC
2
.105
CRIMP
HEIGHT
T14710
RW5F
R4
B30
B40
0
.60
1.75
2.90
QTY
1
1
4
4
COPPER
SIDE
MANUFACTURED AS:
M19532-1A0
MAKE PER E1911
ENCAPSULATE WITH E1844, 2 COATS
TEST PER E3817-SN
3.50 +.04
IDENTIFICATION CODE
EN-166
ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS ± .02
ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS ± .002
ON ALL ANGLES IS ± .5 OF A DEGREE
MATERIAL TOLERANCE (" t ") TO AGREE
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS.
DO NOT SCALE THIS DRAWING
NOTE:
Chg. Sheet No.
6-2-2000
"X" INFO.
XM5626
XC-UF
DESIGN INFORMATION
DRAWN BY:
ENGINEER:
APPROVED:
REFERENCE:
F.V.
SUPERSEDING:
EQUIPMENT TYPE:
SUBJECT:
SCALE: NONE
INVERTER WELDERS
SNUBBER P.C. BOARD ASSEMBLY
DATE: 10-6-99
DRAWING No.:
M 19532-1
Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the
machine.
SOLID EDGE
THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY, CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.
MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE PER E2056
Return to Master TOC
DESCRIPTION
P.C. BOARD BLANK
TAB TERMINAL
EYELET-FEMALE
EYELET-MALE
NOTES:
N.A. FEMALE EYELET TO BE AGAINST THE COPPER SIDE AS SHOWN
EYELET MUST NOT SPIN AFTER CLINCHING.
N.B. SOLDER EYELET SO THAT SOLDER COVERS ENTIRE EYELET
AND ALL AROUND EYELET ON COPPER SIDE ONLY.
NO ICICLES OR SOLDER BLOBS PERMITTED.
EYELET DETAIL
0
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE
Return to Section TOC
.275
.285
1
T14710
RW5F
B20
1
T14710
SNUBBER
R2
∅
MAX.
C4
BOXCP4
.55
Return to Section TOC
2
BOXCP4
C2
PART NO.
M19532-A
T13157-16
T9147-11
T9147-15
B10
B1
2
Return to Section TOC
N.A., N.B.
V350-PRO
Return to Master TOC
We need to know if there are errors in our manuals. We also value any suggestions as to
additional tests or procedures that would make this SVM a better tool for you.
If you discover new or different “Problems or Symptoms” that are not covered in the three column troubleshooting chart, please share this information with us. Please include the
machine’s code number and how the problem was resolved.
Thank You,
Technical Services Group
Lincoln Electric Co.
22801 ST. Clair Ave.
Cleveland, Ohio 44117-1199
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
SVM ERROR REPORTING FORM
FAX 216-481-2309
SVM Number ___________________________
Page Number if necessary__________________
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC
Your Company__________________________
Your Name_____________________________
Please give detailed description below:
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
SD287 01/99